624203
3
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/484
Next page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior fea-
tures
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seatbelt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 20
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk lid
Keyless access with push
button start system............. 23
Remote keyless entry
system................................ 37
Doors.................................... 42
Trunk lid ............................... 45
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 51
Rear seats............................ 54
Head restraints..................... 56
Seatbelts .............................. 58
Steering wheel ..................... 65
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror.......................... 66
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 67
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows
Power windows .................... 70
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .... 73
1-6. Security system
Engine immobilizer
system ................................ 77
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.)............................... 80
Alarm .................................... 81
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 85
SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag).... 87
Front passenger occupant
detection system .............. 122
Child restraint systems ....... 132
Installing child restraints ..... 136
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 146
Push-button ignition
switch ............................... 160
Engine (ignition) switch....... 169
Automatic transmission ...... 172
Manual Transmission ......... 179
Turn signal lever ................. 182
Parking brake ..................... 183
Horn.................................... 184
1
Before driving
2
When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 185
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 190
Multi-information display ..... 195
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch.................. 200
Fog light switch ................... 206
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 207
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control...................... 210
Driving assist systems ........ 215
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............. 221
Vehicle load limits ............... 225
Winter driving tips ............... 226
Trailer towing ...................... 230
Dinghy towing ..................... 231
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system.............................. 234
Automatic air conditioning
system.............................. 241
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ......................... 250
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX/USB port .... 252
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 253
Interior light ...................... 254
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 255
Glove box ......................... 256
Bottle holders ................... 257
Cup holders/console
tray ................................... 258
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors........................... 260
Vanity mirrors ..................... 261
Clock .................................. 262
Outside temperature
display .............................. 263
Power outlets...................... 264
Seat heaters ....................... 266
Floor mat ............................ 268
3
Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior........... 272
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............ 276
Cleaning and protecting
the Alcantara
®
area.......... 280
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 282
General maintenance......... 285
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs.......................... 288
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ...................... 289
Engine hood ....................... 292
Engine compartment .......... 294
Tires ................................... 308
Tire inflation pressure......... 315
Wheels ............................... 319
Air conditioning filter........... 322
Transmitter/access key
battery .............................. 325
Checking and replacing
fuses ................................ 329
Light bulbs.......................... 337
5-1. Essential information
Hazard warning flashers..... 354
If your vehicle needs to
be towed........................... 355
If you think something is
wrong................................ 362
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................. 363
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .......................... 364
If you have a flat tire ........... 378
If the engine will not start.... 389
If the select lever cannot
be shifted from P .............. 392
If you lose your keys........... 393
If the access key does
not operate properly ......... 394
If the battery is
discharged ........................ 398
If your vehicle overheats..... 403
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 406
4
Maintenance and care
5
When trouble arises
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)............ 410
Fuel information .................. 422
Tire information ................... 426
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 439
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................. 444
Seatbelt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ........................ 445
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ........................ 448
Abbreviation list .........................470
Alphabetical index......................471
What to do if... ............................481
6
Vehicle specifications
7
For owners
Index
6
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 67
Engine hood
P. 292
Windshield wipers
P. 207
Headlights
P. 200
Parking lights
P. 200
Front side marker
lights
P. 200
Turn signal lights
P. 182
Front fog lights
P. 206
Daytime running lights
P. 200
Pictorial index
Exterior
Towing eyelet
P. 355
7
Tires
Rotation
Replacement
Inflation pressure
Information
P. 308
P. 378
P. 315
P. 426
Rear window defogger
P. 250
Trunk lid
P. 45
Doors
P. 42
Fuel filler lid
P. 73
Turn signal lights
P. 182
Rear side marker lights
P. 200
: If equipped
License plate lights
P. 200
Tail lights
P. 200
Towing eyelet
P. 355
Towing eyelet
P. 355
8
Pictorial index
Interior
Power outlet
P. 264
Head restraints
P. 56
Seatbelts
P. 58
Cup holders
Console tray
P. 258
P. 258
SRS side airbags
P. 87
Front seats
P. 51
Glove box
P. 256
SRS curtain airbags
P. 87
Child restraint
anchor brackets
P. 136
Navigation system , *
SRS front
passenger airbag
P. 87
9
B
A
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 66
Interior light
P. 254
Vanity mirrors
P. 261
Sun visors
P. 260
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Lock levers
P. 43
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 67
Window lock switch
P. 70
Power window switches
P. 70
Power door lock switch
P. 43
10
: If equipped
C
Pictorial index
Interior
Select lever
Shift lever
P. 172
P. 179
Parking brake lever
P. 183
Vehicle stability control (VSC)/TRAC off switch
P. 216, 218
Seat heater switches
P. 266
“VSC SPORT” switch
P. 217
Power outlet
P. 264
Shift lock release button
P. 392
Driving pattern selector switch
P. 174
11
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 200
P. 182
P. 206
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 185
P. 195
Clock
P. 262
Windshield wiper and washer switch
P. 207
Hazard warning
flasher switch
P. 354
Tilt and telescopic steering
lock release lever
P. 65
Floor mat
P. 268
Engine hood lock release lever
P. 292
Fuel filler lid opener
P. 73
Push-button ignition switch (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
P. 160
AUX port
USB port
P. 252
P. 252
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
: If equipped
12
A
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Air conditioning
system
P. 234
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
P. 250
Air conditioning
system
P. 241
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
switch /rear window defogger switch
P. 250
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
13
C
BB
Paddle shift levers
P. 175, 177
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles
without a keyless access with push
button start system)
P. 169
Cruise control switch
P. 210
Horn
SRS driver airbag
P. 184
P. 87
Instrument panel light control dial
P. 189
Manual headlight leveling dial
P. 202
Trunk lid opener
P. 45
: If equipped
14
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equip-
ment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for
equipment not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the SUBARU policy of continual product improvement,
we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation to make changes on vehicles previously sold.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your SUBARU
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for SUBARU
vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that
SUBARU does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their
performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to,
or adverse effect they may have on, your SUBARU vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine SUBARU products.
Modification with non-genuine SUBARU products could affect its perfor-
mance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations.
In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
15
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Cruise control system
Anti-lock brake system
SRS airbag system
Seatbelt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your SUBARU dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
16
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
SUBARU will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
For use by SUBARU in a law suit
However, if necessary, SUBARU may:
Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
17
Scrapping of your SUBARU
The SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner devices in your SUBARU contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seatbelt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your SUBARU
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These
components may include airbag, seatbelt pretensioners, and transmitter
batteries.
WARNING
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
18
Symbols used throughout this manual
Warnings & Cautions
Symbols used in illustrations
WARNING
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your SUBARU and its
equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and
other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
Before driving
1
19
1-1. Key information
Keys ................................... 20
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk lid
Keyless access with
push button start
system ............................. 23
Remote keyless entry
system ............................. 37
Doors ................................. 42
Trunk lid ............................. 45
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats ......................... 51
Rear seats.......................... 54
Head restraints................... 56
Seatbelts............................ 58
Steering wheel ................... 65
Anti-glare inside rear
view mirror ....................... 66
Outside rear view
mirrors.............................. 67
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows
Power windows .................. 70
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ................................... 73
1-6. Security system
Engine immobilizer
system ............................. 77
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.) ............................ 80
Alarm.................................. 81
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture....... 85
SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................. 87
Front passenger occupant
detection system............ 122
Child restraint systems..... 132
Installing child
restraints ........................ 136
20
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem
Master keys
Operating the remote keyless
entry system (P. 37)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
Access keys
Operating the keyless
access with push button
start system (P. 23)
Operating the remote key-
less entry system
(P. 3 7)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
21
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system)
To take out the mechanical key,
slide the release lever and take
the key out.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the access key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the access key. If the access key
battery is depleted or the “keyless
access” entry function does not
operate properly, you will need
the mechanical key.
(P. 394)
When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk lid opener main switch off as circumstances demand.
(P. 46)
On vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system, provide
the attendant with the valet key.
On vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system, remove the
mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the access
key only.
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key
(without a keyless access with push button start system) or mechanical key
(with a keyless access with push button start system) is lost, a new key can
be made at your SUBARU dealer using the key number plate. (P. 393)
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with remote keyless entry system onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
22
1-1. Key information
CAUTION
To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
Do not disassemble the keys.
Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Do not place
the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio
systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-
frequency therapy equipment.
Carrying the access key on your person (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
Carry the access key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances
that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9
in. (10 cm) of the access key may interfere with the key, causing the key to
not function properly.
In case of a keyless access with push button start system malfunction
or other key-related problems (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system)
Take your vehicle with all the access keys provided with your vehicle to your
SUBARU dealer.
When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your SUBARU dealer immediately with all remaining access keys that were
provided with your vehicle.
23
1
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Keyless access with push button start system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
access key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the access key.)
Unlocks and locks the doors (P. 2 4 )
Unlocks the trunk lid (P. 2 4 )
Starts the engine (P. 160)
Access key
Access key
Access key
: If equipped
24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger’s door handle to unlock all
the doors.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the door is
locked.
Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the side of the
door handle) to lock the doors.
Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the button to unlock the
trunk lid.
25
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Effective range (areas within which the access key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the access key is
within about 1.3 - 2.6 ft. (0.4 -
0.8 m) of either of the outside
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
lid
The system can be operated
when the access key is
within about 1.3 - 2.6 ft. (0.4 -
0.8 m) of the trunk lid release
button.
When starting the engine
or changing push-button
ignition switch modes
The system can be operated
when the access key is
inside the vehicle.
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor
Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting
from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures for the warning light
that comes on. (P. 374)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock either door by opening
a door and putting the lock
lever into the lock position,
then closing the door by
pulling on the outside door
handle with the access key
still inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the access
key from the vehicle
and lock the doors
again.
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How-
ever, depending on the location of the access key, the key may be detected
as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the doors using the
keyless access with push
button start system while
the access key was still
inside the vehicle.
Retrieve the access
key from the vehicle
and lock the doors
again.
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
The push-button ignition
switch was turned to
“ACC” mode while the
driver’s door was open (or
the driver’s door was
opened while the push-
button ignition switch was
in “ACC” mode).
Turn the push-button
ignition switch off and
close the driver’s
door.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously*
The driver’s door was
opened while any shift
position other than P was
selected without turning off
the push-button ignition
switch.
Shift the select lever
to P.
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the access
key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle
is not in operation for a long time.
In the following situations, the keyless access with push button start sys-
tem may take some time to unlock the doors.
The access key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
The keyless access with push button start system has not been used
for 5 days or longer.
If the keyless access with push button start system has not been used for
14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any door except the
driver’s door.
In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the remote key-
less entry system or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Conditions affecting operation
The keyless access with push button start system uses weak radio waves. In
the following situations, the communication between the access key and the
vehicle may be affected, preventing the keyless access with push button
start system, remote keyless entry system and engine immobilizer system
from operating properly. (Way of coping P. 394)
When the access key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When the access key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
Metallic wallets or bags
Coins
Hand warmers made of metal
Media such as CDs and DVDs
When another transmitters (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
When carrying the access key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-
munication device
Another vehicle's access key or a transmitter that emits radio waves
Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
Digital audio players
Portable game systems
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
When the access key is placed near a battery charger or electronic
devices
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Notes for the “keyless access” entry function
Even when the access key is within the effective range (detection areas),
the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
The access key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near
the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
The access key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk lid is unlocked.
The access key is on the instrument panel, rear shelf or floor, in the
door pockets or glove box or auxiliary box when the engine is started or
push-button ignition switch modes are changed.
Do not leave the access key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave
reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin
and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the
access key inside the vehicle.
As long as the access key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
Even if the access key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start
the engine if the access key is near the window.
The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the access key is within
the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after approxi-
mately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
If the remote keyless entry system is used to lock the doors when the
access key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the “keyless access” entry function. (Use the remote key-
less entry system to unlock the doors.)
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Notes for locking the doors
Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition
signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni-
tion signals will be given.
If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the
access key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In this case, place the access key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or
more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto-
len), and continue to wash the vehicle.
If the access key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the
alarm, lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.
Notes for the unlocking function
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle
again.
If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the
access key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In this case, place the access key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or
more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto-
len), and continue to wash the vehicle.
If there is another access key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the access key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
The keyless access with push button start system can be deactivated in
advance. (P. 439)
Alarm* (if equipped)
Using the keyless access with push button start system to lock the doors will
set the alarm system. (P. 81)
*: The alarm’s default setting is set to off.
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the access key when operating the system. Do not get
the access key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the
outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the access key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may
not operate.)
If the keyless access with push button start system does not operate
properly
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid: Use the
mechanical key. (P. 394)
Starting the engine:P. 395
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Access key battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
engine stops. (P. 374)
As the access key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the access key is not used. The following symptoms
indicate that the access key battery may be depleted. Replace the bat-
tery when necessary. (P. 325)
The keyless access with push button start system or the remote key-
less entry system does not operate.
The detection area becomes smaller.
The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the access key close to any
of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Glass top ranges
Table lamps
When the access key battery is fully depleted
P. 325
If the keyless access with push button start system has been deacti-
vated in a customized setting
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid: Use the remote
keyless entry system or mechanical key. (P. 37, 394)
Starting the engine and changing push-button ignition switch modes:
P. 395
Stopping the engine: P. 397
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Customization that can be configured at SUBARU dealer
Settings (e. g. keyless access with push button start system) can be
changed. (Customizable features: P. 439)
Certification for keyless access with push button start system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAE FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF03
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions sui-
vantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du disposi-
tif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
WARNING
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the keyless access with push button start system antennas.
(P. 25)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the “keyless access” entry function can be disabled. Ask your SUBARU
dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emit-
ting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable
the “keyless access” entry function.
Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your SUBARU dealer for details for disabling the “keyless access” entry
function.
37
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Before driving
Remote keyless entry system
The remote keyless entry system can be used to lock and unlock the
vehicle.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem
Locks both side doors
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks both side doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other door.
Unlocks the trunk lid
(press and hold)
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
Locks both side doors
Unlocks both side doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other door.
Unlocks the trunk lid
(press and hold)
Sounds alarm
(press and hold)
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash to indicate
that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once;
Unlocked: twice)
Trunk lid: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk lid has been unlocked.
Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a keyless access with push button
start system)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
Panic mode
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the transmitter.
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the access key.
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Vehicle finder function
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
A buzzer (sounds once) and the hazard
warning flashers (flash 3 times) are used
to inform the driver of the vehicle’s loca-
tion.
Press 3 times within 5 seconds
while within a circumference of approxi-
mately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle.
However, if the interval between the 3
presses is short, the system may not be
activated.This setting must be custom-
ized at your SUBARU dealer.
A buzzer (sounds once) and the hazard
warning flashers (flash 3 times) are used
to inform the driver of the vehicle’s loca-
tion.
Press 3 times within 5 seconds
while within a circumference of approxi-
mately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle.
However, if the interval between the 3
presses is short, the system may not be
activated.This setting must be custom-
ized at your SUBARU dealer.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The remote keyless entry system may not operate normally in the following
situations:
When the transmitter battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
When the transmitter is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
When other transmitters (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
P. 3 0
If the remote keyless entry system does not operate properly (vehicles
with a keyless access with push button start system)
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid: Use the mechanical
key. (P. 394)
Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
If the remote keyless entry system does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 325)
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
P. 3 4
When the access key battery is fully depleted
P. 325
Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask
your SUBARU dealer for details.
Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer
Settings (e.g. remote keyless entry system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 439)
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Certification for remote keyless entry system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAA FCC ID: HYQ12BBY
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions sui-
vantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du disposi-
tif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the “keyless access”
entry function, remote keyless entry system, key or power door lock
switch.
Keyless access” entry function (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
P. 2 4
Remote keyless entry system
P. 3 7
Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem
Locks driver’s side door
Unlocks driver’s side door
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 394)
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Power door lock switch
Locks both side doors
Unlocks both side doors
Lock lever
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Locking the doors from the outside without a key
Move the lock lever to the lock position.
Close the door.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The door cannot be locked if the access key is left inside the vehi-
cle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Window open/close function linked to door operation
In order to make opening and closing the doors easier, completely closed
windows are linked to door operations. Therefore, when a door is opened, its
window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely.
However, if the battery has discharged or is disconnected, this function will
not operate. (P. 402)
If the keyless access with push button start system has been deacti-
vated in a customized setting (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system)
Use the remote keyless entry system or mechanical key. (P. 37, 394)
WARNING
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Always use a seatbelt.
Always lock both side doors.
Ensure that both side doors are properly closed.
Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
STEP
1
STEP
2
45
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Before driving
Trunk lid
The trunk lid can be opened using the key, trunk lid opener, “keyless
access” entry function or remote keyless entry system.
Opening the trunk lid from inside the vehicle
Press and hold the opener
switch to release the trunk lid.
If the trunk lid cannot be
opened by the opener switch:
P. 4 6
Opening the trunk lid from outside the vehicle
Key (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system)
Turn the master key clockwise
to release the trunk lid.
“Keyless access” entry function (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
P. 2 4
Remote keyless entry system
P. 3 7
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
Canceling the trunk lid opener feature
To protect luggage stored in the trunk lid against theft, do the follow-
ing:
Turn the main switch in the trunk
lid off to disable the trunk lid
opener.
On (The trunk lid can be
opened using the trunk lid
opener.)
Off (The trunk lid cannot be
opened using the trunk lid
opener.)
Vehicles without a keyless access
with push button start system:
The trunk lid can only be opened
with the master key.
Vehicles with a keyless access
with push button start system:
The trunk lid can only be opened
with the mechanical key.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
Function to prevent the trunk lid being locked with the access key
inside (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system)
When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the access key
left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the “keyless access” entry
function.
Even when the spare access key is put in the trunk with all the doors
locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the
trunk lid can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all access keys
with you when leaving the vehicle.
Even when the access key is put in the trunk with all the doors are
locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the
surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement pre-
vention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the
trunk lid is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing
the trunk lid.
The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one
of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk lid using the trunk lid
opener.
Internal trunk lid release lever
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a keyless access with push
button start system)
The trunk lid can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 394)
Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after dis-
abling the trunk lid opener main switch
P. 2 1
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling on
the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
WARNING
Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit nearby objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffo-
cate.
Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
1
Before driving
WARNING
Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again
after it is opened.
When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk lid is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed
again after it is opened.
The trunk lid may fall if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the trunk lid on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make
sure that the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk lid
CAUTION
Trunk lid damper stays
The trunk lid is equipped with damper stays that hold the trunk lid in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to trunk lid damper stays, resulting in a
malfunction.
Do not attach any foreign objects such as stickers, plastic sheets and
adhesives to damper stay rods.
Do not touch damper stay rods with gloves or other fabric items.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine parts to the trunk lid.
Do not apply lateral force to damper stays or place your hand on it.
51
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Getting in and out of the rear seats
To get in and out of the rear seats, use the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever or seatback fold strap.
Before getting in or out of the rear seats
Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt guide. (P. 5 9)
Getting in the rear seats
Lift the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever.
The seatback will fold forward.
Front passenger seat only: The
seat can be slid forward and
backward.
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
Seatback fold strap
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Getting out of the rear seats
Pull the seatback fold strap.
The seatback will fold forward.
Front passenger seat only: The
seat can be slid forward and
backward.
After getting in or out of the rear seats
Return the seatback to the upright position until the seat locks.
Front passenger seat only: The seat will lock in position at the point where
the seatback reaches the upright position.
Seat dust cover
Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur-
chase before using the seat.
WARNING
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, push it slightly to make sure it is securely locked.
If the seat is not securely locked, it may move or the seatbelt may not
operate properly.
Take care not to hit passengers with the seat.
When sliding the seat rearward, make sure not to squash the legs of the
rear passengers.
When returning the seatback upright, perform seatback angle adjustment
while holding down the seatback.
Do not pull on or use the seatbelt guide to adjust or fold the front seat.
When driving the vehicle
Never operate the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold strap.
Doing so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Getting in and out of the rear seats
When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to get your hands,
legs, etc. squashed in the movable or connecting parts.
When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to trip on the seat
rails.
After getting in or out of the rear seats, always make sure the front seat is
locked in position.
When operating the front seat from the rear seat
Make sure that no passenger is seated in the front seat.
CAUTION
When getting in and out the vehicle
Do not rub your back against the side support pad of backrest. Otherwise
surface of the side support pad is damaged early. You can move the seat
backward to prevent the contact.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
Seat dust cover
Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur-
chase before using the seat.
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
Pull the both left and right
seatback lock release straps
in the trunk lid to fold down the
seatback.
To return the seatbacks to its
original position, lift it up until it
locks.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
WARNING
When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the select
lever to P (automatic transmission) or shift lever to neutral (manual trans-
mission).
Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv-
ing.
Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
After returning the rear seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Check that the seatbelts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
Before using the rear seatbelts
Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked in position by lightly pushing it
back and forth.
If the seatback is not securely locked,
the red portion of the seatback lock
release button will be visible. Make
sure that the red portion is not visible.
Always make sure that the seatbelt is
not caught in the seatback or twisted in
one of the hooks that secure the seat-
back. Failure to do so may cause the
seatbelt to not be fastened correctly or
to become ineffective in a collision,
resulting in serious injury.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Removing the head restraints
Installing the head restraints
Head restraints are provided for front seats.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
WARNING
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seatbelts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seatbelts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
Correct use of the seatbelts
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seatbelt.
Fastening and releasing the seatbelt
Fasten the seatbelt
Push the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
Release the seatbelt
Press the release button.
Release button
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Front seatbelt guide
To enable the seatbelt to be eas-
ily extended, pass the seatbelt
through the guide.
When getting in or out of the rear
seats, release the seatbelt from
the guide.
Seatbelt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat-
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seatbelt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision and/or side collision.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (P. 136)
Child seatbelt usage
The seatbelts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult
size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seatbelt.
(P. 132)
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's
seatbelt, follow the instructions on P. 58 regarding seatbelt usage.
Seatbelt pretensioners
Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor frontal or
side impact, in rear impacts or in roll-over accidents.
The following four components operate simultaneously when the vehicle
is subjected to a severe frontal collision.
Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger
SRS front airbag for driver
SRS front airbag for front passenger*
*: This does not operate while the occupant detection system determines to
deactivate the airbag operation. For details, refer to “Front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag” (P. 95)
The following two components operate simultaneously when the vehicle
is subjected to a severe collision on the driver’s seat side of the vehicle.
Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
Side airbag for driver
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
The following two components operate simultaneously when the vehicle
is subjected to a severe collision on the front passenger’s seat side of the
vehicle.
Seatbelt pretensioner for front passenger
Side airbag for front passenger
Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated, both the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seatbelt retractor assemblies must be replaced only by SUBARU
dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine
SUBARU parts.
If either front seatbelt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a
malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
If the front seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it
has seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this
section.
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Wearing a seatbelt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seatbelt.
Always wear a seatbelt properly.
Each seatbelt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seatbelt
for more than one person at once, including children.
SUBARU recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seatbelt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seatbelt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
Always wear your seatbelt low and snug across your hips.
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat-
belt in the proper way. (P. 58)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seatbelt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
WARNING
People with a medical condition
Obtain medical advice and wear the seatbelt in the proper way.
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seatbelt. If the seatbelt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
Seatbelt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS airbag system warning light will
come on. In that case, the seatbelt cannot be used again and must be
replaced at your SUBARU dealer.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
WARNING
Seatbelt damage and wear
Do not damage the seatbelts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
Inspect the seatbelt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Replace a damaged seatbelt immediately. Damaged seatbelts can-
not protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seatbelt does not function correctly, immediately contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seatbelts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your SUBARU
dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from
operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
When using the seatbelt guide
Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the
guide.
Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seatbelt
guide button.
Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully.
Before using the rear seatbelts
Always make sure that the seatbelt is
not caught in the seatback or twisted in
one of the hooks that secure the seat-
back. Failure to do so may cause the
seatbelt to not be fastened correctly or
to become ineffective in a collision,
resulting in serious injury.
65
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Steering wheel
WARNING
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Anti-glare function
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be
reduced by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating
posture.
WARNING
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
67
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Folding the mirrors
Manual operation
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Power operation (if equipped)
Press the switch to fold the mir-
rors.
Press it again to extend them to
the original position.
The mirrors can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode.
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers.
Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror
defoggers. (P. 250)
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
WARNING
When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
70
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window glasses.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
71
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either door is opened.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ACC” mode or turned off.
They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the body, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
72
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, close all the doors perform the following operations using the
power window switch on the relevant door.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system:
After stopping the vehicle, the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: After
stopping the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch is turned to
“ON” mode.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position two
consecutive times.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position
once again and continue holding for 1 second or more after the win-
dow closes completely.
If you push the power window switch to the opening position while the win-
dow is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to
close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure
correctly, we recommend that you have your SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
73
1
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem: Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors
and windows are closed.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system:
Turn the push-button ignition switch off and ensure that all the
doors and windows are closed.
Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 74 )
Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler lid.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
74
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler lid.
STEP
3
Fuel types
Unleaded gasoline (93 AKI [Research Octane Number 98] or higher)
If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not avail-
able, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be
used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.
75
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
WARNING
Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not handle fuel indoors.
After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
76
1-5. Refueling
WARNING
When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck
Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off
Do not top off the fuel tank
Observe other precautions that are posted at the service station.
Turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If
the cap is not securely tightened, fuel spillage could occur in the event of
an accident, creating a fire hazard.
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle's painted surface.
Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning
agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to
the engine.
77
1
Before driving
1-6. Security system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles without a keyless
access with push button
start system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
78
1-6. Security system
When the vehicle cannot be started with the registered key (vehicles
without a keyless access with push button start system)
Remove the key and try again.
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
If the key is in contact with a metallic object
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
Vehicles with a keyless
access with push button
start system
The indicator light flashes after
the push-button ignition switch
has been turned off to indicate
that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the push-button igni-
tion switch has been turned to
“ACC” or “ON” mode to indi-
cate that the system has been
canceled.
79
1-6. Security system
1
Before driving
Certification for engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB03 FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE:
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions sui-
vantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du disposi-
tif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce
brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
CAUTION
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
80
1-6. Security system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from sto-
len vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
81
1
1-6. Security system
Before driving
Alarm
The alarm’s default setting is set to off. To use the alarm, perform the
activating the alarm system procedures.
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible
entry is detected.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered when a locked door or the trunk lid is
unlocked or opened in any way other than using the “keyless
access” entry function or remote keyless entry system while the
alarm is set.
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors and/or trunk lid and perform one of the follow-
ing:
Lock the doors using the “keyless access” entry function.
Lock the doors using the remote keyless entry system.
Lock the doors from the outside without using a key.
(P. 44)
The system will be set auto-
matically after 30 seconds or
more elapse.
The indicator light changes
from being on to flashing when
the system is set.
: If equipped
82
1-6. Security system
Activating/deactivating the alarm system
Check that both side doors and the trunk lid are closed.
Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode.
Open the driver’s door while
pressing and holding on
the power door lock switch and
continue to press for
approximately 10 seconds after
the driver’s door has opened.
The alarm system changes
between activated and deacti-
vated as follows.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Perform one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:
Unlock the doors using the “keyless access” entry function.
Unlock the doors using the remote keyless entry system.
Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” mode,
or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped
after a few seconds.)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
Alarm status Horn
Multi-information dis-
play
Deactivated Sounds twice AL oF
Activated Sounds once AL on
83
1-6. Security system
1
Before driving
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following.
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows are closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
Opening and closing the trunk lid
If the alarm setting operations are performed with the trunk lid left open,
the alarm will not be set. After closing the trunk lid, the alarm is set after
30 seconds or more elapse.
When the trunk lid is unlocked using the “keyless access” entry function
or remote keyless entry system while the alarm is set, the alarm goes
into standby mode. After closing the trunk lid, the alarm is set again after
30 seconds or more elapse.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.
A person inside the vehicle opens a
door or the trunk lid.
The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.
84
1-6. Security system
When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.
If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the
alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer
Settings (e.g. alarm system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 439)
CAUTION
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
85
1
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 5 1 )
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 51)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able. (P. 5 1 )
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel to allow easy opera-
tion and to ensure the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 6 5 )
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears.
(P. 5 6 )
Wear the seatbelt correctly.
(P. 5 8 )
86
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
While driving
Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent resulting in serious injury or death. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
Adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
87
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seatbelts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is
used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle’s seat-
belts.
Models with SRS airbags and shoulder restraints for driver,
front passenger, and window-side rear passengers
Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in
addition to a shoulder belt at each front seating position and each
rear window-side seating positions. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of six airbags. The configurations are as
follows.
88
1-7. Safety information
When you sell your vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal airbags
Driver’s and front passenger’s side airbags
Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side
rear passengers)
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the pri-
mary protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For opera-
tion instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt preten-
sioner, refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners”. (
P. 5 9 )
89
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
WARNING
SRS airbag
To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and
all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seatbelts when the vehi-
cle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the
primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need
to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best
combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a
crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to
“Seatbelts”. (P. 58)
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the
SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed - faster than the blink of an
eye - and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag
can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can
result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position
such as one thrown forward during pre-accident braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occu-
pant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or
arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants
who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer
very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat
as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehi-
cle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between
you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could
interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle
and cause injury.
90
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
SRS airbag
Put children aged 12 and under in the
rear seat properly restrained at all
times. The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force and can
injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are lighter
and weaker than adults, their risk of
being injured from deployment is
greater.
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including those
in child seats and those that have out-
grown child restraint devices) sit in the
REAR seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for
the child's age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
For instructions and precautions con-
cerning the child restraint system, refer
to “Child restraint systems”. (P. 132)
91
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
WARNING
SRS airbag
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passenger’s seat,
or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.
When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke
could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing prob-
lems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if
they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
92
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbag system components
Front sub sensor (right-hand
side)
SRS airbag system warning
light
Frontal airbag module
(driver's side) (two-stage)
Front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicator
(center of instrument panel)
Frontal airbag module (front
passenger’s side) (two-
stage)
Front passenger’s occupant
detection control module
Door impact sensor (right-
hand side)
Curtain airbag module (right
side)
Airbag wiring
Side airbag module (front
passenger’s side)
Side airbag sensor (center
pillar right-hand side)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear
wheel house right-hand side)
Seatbelt pretensioner (front
passenger’s side)
Satellite safing sensor
(under the center of the rear
seats)
Front passenger’s occupant
detection system sensor
Seatbelt buckle switch (front
passenger’s side)
Seatbelt pretensioner
(driver’s side)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear
wheel house left-hand side)
93
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sys-
tem controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front pas-
senger. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front
passenger occupant detection control module etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag control module. The
airbag control module consists of an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe front or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-
tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
Side airbag sensor (center
pillar left-hand side)
Side airbag module (driver’s
side)
Door impact sensor (left-
hand side)
Airbag control module
(including impact sensors)
Front sub sensor (left-hand
side)
Curtain airbag module (left
side)
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side
rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
The windshield may crack.
94
1-7. Safety information
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag require-
ments in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically deter-
mines the deployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal airbag at the
time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of
the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver’s and front passengers
sun visors beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR
BAGS” and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the
phrase “Even with Advanced Air Bags”. Make sure that you carefully
read the instructions on the warning labels and tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in com-
bination with a seatbelt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the
steering wheel. The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
near the top of the dashboard under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components
deploy.
SRS frontal airbag for driver
SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
These components supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact
to the occupant’s head and chest.
95
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator oper-
ates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.
Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Front passengers SRS frontal airbag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The
inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.
The occupant detection system sensor is installed under the seat upholstery
and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is nor-
mal. In this case, although the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag does not
operate, the front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner operates with the
driver’s seatbelt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner,
refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners”. (P. 59)
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or
cause the system to fail.
Do not apply any strong impact to the front passenger’s seat.
Do not spill liquid on the front passenger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately.
Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger’s seat.
Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a
genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s seat.
Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger’s
seat.
Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle.
96
1-7. Safety information
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger’s occupant detection
system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate.
Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected
at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passenger’s seat while driving
the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators
P. 122
Occupant detection system
The occupant detection system sensor is installed under the seat upholstery
and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the
ability of the system to determine deployment. If the seat cushion is wet, the
front passenger should stop sitting on the front passenger’s seat. Wipe off
liquid from the seat immediately, let the seat dry naturally and then check the
SRS airbag system warning light as follows.
If the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates, keep the seat dry until
the warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag system warning light stays
on even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passenger’s seat and have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If the SRS airbag system warning light does not illuminate, check that the
front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators work properly. If
the indicators do not work properly, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passenger’s seat and have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
97
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger’s
seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deploy-
ment. This may prevent the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front
passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage
and electronic devices from the front passenger’s seat.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. This device may cause
interference. If this device causes interference, consult the nearest SUBARU
dealer. Also, for maintenance of the system, consult the nearest SUBARU
dealer.
Conditions in which front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is not acti-
vated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of
the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger’s seat:
The seat is empty.
The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an
infant is restrained in it.
The occupant changed their posture after the occupant load is judged.
The front passenger’s occupant detection system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
When the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate
child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may
interfere with the proper operation of the occupant detection system, activating
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by
the infant in the child restraint system.
Do not place any article (including electronic devices) on the seat other than
the infant in the child restraint system.
Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system.
98
1-7. Safety information
If the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child
restraint system (including booster seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a keyless
access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition switch
off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system) if the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator
turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system
(including booster seat). Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By
referring to the child restraint manufacturer’s recommendations as well as
the child restraint system installation procedures in “Child restraint systems”
(P. 132), correctly install the child restraint system. Turn the ignition switch
to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system), or turn the push-button ignition switch to the “ON” mode (vehicles
with a keyless access with push button start system) and make sure that the
front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator
illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off,
take the following actions.
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint
system and the child occupant.
Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passen-
ger’s seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and
forth.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off
after taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child
restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating posture. The child should always wear
the seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is
deactivated or activated. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is acti-
vated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns
off), take the following actions.
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the
child/small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspec-
tion, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always
take the rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.
Conditions in which front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment
upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front
passenger’s seat.
When the seat is occupied by an adult.
When a certain item(s) (e.g. jug of water) is placed on the seat.
100
1-7. Safety information
If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by
an adult
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger’s
seat. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a key-
less access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition
switch off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system).
Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, posi-
tion his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a keyless
access with push button start system), or turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem). If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains
off, take the following actions.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system:
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system:
Turn the push-button ignition switch off.
Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, seat cushion,
seat cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should
remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger’s
seat, or should sit in a rear seat.
Next, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to
allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check,
both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illu-
minate while the OFF indicator remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains
off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for
persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system
(U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front
bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination
meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can
affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have
any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
HI 96819
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automobile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If
you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer
from which you bought your vehicle.
102
1-7. Safety information
Operation
Driver's side
Passenger’s side
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start
to deflate immediately so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed.
SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a
collision occurs.
After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start
to deflate immediately so that the
driver's vision is not obstructed.
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag depending on the characteristic of the item(s) or person on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag may
deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the sys-
tem.
If the front sub sensors and the impact sensors in the airbag control module
detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control
module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s module or both
driver’s and front passenger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate
the SRS frontal airbag(s).
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use dual stage infla-
tors. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or
simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the
characteristic of the item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the
driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to
the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non-
accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not
obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver's ability to maintain con-
trol of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal
result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
104
1-7. Safety information
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are
designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to
severe frontal collision. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser fron-
tal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seat-
belt alone. Also, they are not designed to deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most roll-over accidents because deployment of only the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag or both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those situations. The driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to function on a one-time-only
basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the
passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of
collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done
to the vehicle itself.
Example of accident in which the driver’s/drivers and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speeds of 12 to
19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver’s SRS frontal air-
bag or both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s)
will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar
in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy
Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the
driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely
to occur
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require
deployment of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s).
In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of
accident forces involved.
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
106
1-7. Safety information
The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
The vehicle sustains an offset frontal colli-
sion.
The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked vehi-
cle.
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Examples of the types of accidents in which the drivers/driver’s and
front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will basically not deploy
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto
its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision.
First impact
Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double colli-
sion, first with another vehicle, then
against a concrete wall in immediate suc-
cession, once either or both of the driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bags is/are activated on the first impact,
it/they will not be activated on the second
impact.
108
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
If the SRS airbags deploy
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel
and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause
burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
Child restraint precautions
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a
correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing
child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even chil-
dren who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the
REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passenger’s seat
may be killed or severely injured should the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat
seatback, which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on
the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and
the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact
on the occupant’s chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates
only for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof
side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An “SRS
AIRBAG” mark is located at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag
on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant
and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the
impact on the occupant’s head.
110
1-7. Safety information
Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag can function only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS side airbags and SRS curtain air-
bags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sen-
sor. Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS front airbags in the steering wheel and
instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the left
and right center pillars, doors and rear wheel houses. Another impact sen-
sor, which also senses impact force, is located under the center of the rear
seats.
If the impact sensor that is located under the center of the rear seats and
one of the center pillar impact sensors or door impact sensors together
sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the
control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the
impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact
sensor on the same side senses an impact.
If the impact sensor that is located under the center of the rear seats and
one of the rear wheel house impact sensors together sense an impact force
above a predetermined level, the control module causes only the SRS cur-
tain airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The
time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag
after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment
then slowly deflates.
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one
occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly
loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to deploy in the
event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision.
They are not designed to deploy in most lesser side impact. Also, they are
not designed to deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts because SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not help the occupant
in those situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed to function on a
one-time-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of
force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact colli-
sion. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have
no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag will most likely deploy
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents
like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag may not
deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag.
112
1-7. Safety information
The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
113
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag will basically not deploy
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in
most cases if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision or is struck from
behind. Examples of such accidents are illustrated.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle
and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will
not be activated on the second.
The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
The vehicle is struck from behind.
SRS curtain airbag
SRS side airbag
Second impact First impact
114
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
If the SRS airbags deploy
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat
seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns
because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag system
(from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so
can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag precautions
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed only to be a sup-
plement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not do
away with the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear your seat-
belt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a
proper upright position.
When to contact your SUBARU dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain airbags to inflate.
The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain airbags inside is
scratched, cracked or otherwise dam-
aged.
116
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seatbelts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seatbelts.
The driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and
sit upright and well back in the seat.
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seatbelt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. SUBARU strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 132)
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
118
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components (P. 92).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board or steering wheel pad.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver and front passenger
airbags deploy.
Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, rear quarter glass, front and rear
pillar or roof side rail.
119
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
WARNING
SRS airbag precautions
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your SUBARU dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails.
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-
garoo bar etc.).
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players.
Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
120
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually
monitors the readiness of the
SRS airbag system (including
front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven.
The SRS airbag system warning
light will show normal system
operation by illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side)
Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side)
Door impact sensor (right-hand side)
Door impact sensor (left-hand side)
Side airbag module (driver’s side)
Side airbag module (front passenger’s side)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side)
Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side)
Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
121
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats)
Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s side)
Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s side)
Front passenger’s occupant detection system sensor
Front passenger’s occupant detection control module
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator
All related wiring
WARNING
SRS warning light
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a
malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. Imme-
diately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system
checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners
and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which
may increase the risk of injury.
Flashing or flickering of the warning light
No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned
to the “ON” position.
Continuous illumination of the warning light
Illumination of the warning light while driving
122
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant detection system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant detection
system. Using the sensors installed under the seat cover, the system
detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or
deactivates the frontal airbag for front passenger seat. The occupant
detection system may not inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is not
a malfunction. If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passengers
occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU
dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illumi-
nates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper func-
tion of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer and have your vehicle inspected. Do
not use the front passenger seat while driving to your SUBARU
dealer.
SRS airbag system warning light
Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
123
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show
you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. When
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, (vehicles without a
keyless access with push button start system), or the push-button
ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system), both the ON and OFF indi-
cators illuminate for 6 seconds during the system check. After the
system check, both the ON and OFF indicators turn off for 2 sec-
onds. Then, either the ON or OFF indicator illuminates depending
on the condition of the front passenger’s frontal airbag.
When the OFF indicator remains off and ON indicator illuminates,
the front passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a collision.
When the OFF indicator illuminates and ON indicator remains off,
the front passenger’s frontal airbag does not deploy during a colli-
sion.
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators
remain on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
(vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system)
or the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles
with a keyless access with push button start system), or the indica-
tors remain off after the system check, the system may be malfunc-
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer
immediately.
After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag determined by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag monitoring system.
124
1-7. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
detection system
*1
Adult
*2
Child restraint system with infant
*6, *7, *8
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS airbag system warning light Off
Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light
Flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
On
Front side airbag
*4
Front curtain airbag
*4
Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner
*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
*9
SRS airbag system warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Off
Front side airbag
*4
On
Front curtain airbag
*4
Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner
*4
125
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Child
*5, *7
Unoccupied
There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF” or “AIR
BAG ON”
*5
SRS airbag system warning light Off
Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light
Off or
flashing
*3, *5
Devices
Front passenger airbag Off or on
*5
Front side airbag
*4
On
Front curtain airbag
*4
Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner
*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS airbag system warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Off
Front side airbag
*4
On
Front curtain airbag
*4
Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner
*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS airbag system warning light On
Front passenger’s seatbelt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Off
Front side airbag
*4
On
Front curtain airbag
*4
Front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner
*4
126
1-7. Safety information
*
1
: The occupant detection system does not operate during self-
checking.
*
2
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not
recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and
posture.
*
3
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seatbelt.
*
4
: The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, SRS curtain airbag and
seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the occupant detection
system.
*
5
: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in
convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a
child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or pos-
ture.
Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should
always wear the seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of
whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.
*
6
: When a child restraint system is installed on the front passenger
seat, do not place any article on the seat other than the child
occupant and a child restraint system.
Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant detec-
tion system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.
*
7
: Do not place more than one child on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant detec-
tion system from functioning correctly.
*
8
: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
See the caution that follows regarding installation of a child
restraint system. (P. 136)
*
9
: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual on
how to installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 136)
127
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator
turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult
This can be caused by an adult incorrectly sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat. Perform the following.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system:
Turn the push-button ignition switch off.
Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright
position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, cor-
rectly wear the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and
adjust the seat to the rearmost position.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
The engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system:
The push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode.
Turn the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indi-
cator remains off, perform the following.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system:
The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
Turn the push-button ignition switch off.
Make sure that the front passenger is not using a blanket,
seat cushion, seat cover or seat heater, etc.
If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger
should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger seat, or should sit in a rear seat.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
128
1-7. Safety information
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
keyless access with push button start system), or the push-
button ignition switch to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system). The ON and OFF indi-
cators illuminate for 6 seconds during the system check and
after the system check is performed, the ON and OFF indica-
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Then, the OFF indicator remains
off while the ON indicator is illuminated. If the ON indicator
remains off and the OFF indicator is illuminated, move the
occupant to the rear seat backwards and immediately contact
your SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)
This can be caused by the child restraint system being installed incor-
rectly. Perform the following.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system:
Turn the push-button ignition switch off.
Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By referring
to the child restraint manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation procedure in “child
restraint system”, correctly reinstall the child restraint system.
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
129
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
The engine switch is turned to the “ON” position and make
sure that the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system:
The push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode and
make sure that the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON indica-
tor turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indi-
cator turns off, perform the following.
Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the
child restraint system and the child occupant.
Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of
front passenger seat are locked into place securely by mov-
ing the seat back and forth.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indi-
cator turns off after taking the relevant corrective actions
described above, relocate the child restraint system to the
rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for
an inspection.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
130
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
Front passenger occupant detection system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant
detection system.
Failure to do so may cause the occupant detection system to not function
correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
Wear the seatbelt properly.
Do not apply excessive force to the seat.
Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery.
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
Do not spill liquid on the front passenger seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately and dry the seat. If the airbag warning light illuminates, dry
the seat until the warning light turns off. If the airbag warning light stays on
even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front pas-
senger seat and have the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. If the
airbag warning light does not illuminate, check that the airbag ON/OFF
indicator light works properly. If the indicator light does not work properly,
do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger’s seat and have the sys-
tem inspected by your SUBARU dealer.
Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger seat. Also, do not
replace or modify the seat upholstery or foam inside the seat.
Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a gen-
uine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger’s seat.
Do not place a magnetized items near the seatbelt buckle.
131
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
WARNING
Front passenger occupant detection system precautions
Never install a rearward facing child seat in the front passenger’s seat
even if the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is deactivated. Be sure to
install it in the rear seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recom-
mended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in
the rear seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint
system be also seated in the rear seat. This is because children sitting in
the front passenger’s seat may be killed or severely injured should the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag deploy. SUBARU believes that the
rear seats are the safest place for children
If luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger seat,
the OFF indicator may turn off and the ON indicator may illuminate. If this
occurs, the front passenger’s airbag may deploy during a collision. If this is
not desirable, remove the luggage or electronic devices from the front pas-
senger seat.
Modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the front passen-
ger occupant detection system. (U.S. only) Removing, replacing or modify-
ing any parts of the front seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame,
instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column,
tires, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU
front passenger occupant detection system.
132
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 136)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-
erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.
133
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seatbelt.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seatbelt. (P. 58)
Where to place a child restraint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommendations on where to place a child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Front passenger’s seat
Rear seat seating positions
134
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger’s seat
Do not install a child restraint system (including a booster cushion) due to
the hazard to children posed by the passenger’s airbag.
Rear seat seating positions
Recommended installing positions for the child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child
restraint system.
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seatbelts
ISOFIX anchor bars
Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraints might not be able to be secured firmly due to
projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that
has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion
and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.
WARNING
Child restraint precautions
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seatbelt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
SUBARU strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that
conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
135
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
WARNING
Child restraint precautions
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain airbags deploy even
if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS
side airbags and curtain airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seatbelt. If the seatbelt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart-
ment.
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
136
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or
a seatbelt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for both rear seats. (Buttons
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seatbelts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seatbelt) (P. 5 8 )
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for both rear seats.
137
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
1
STEP
2
138
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Latch the buckles onto
the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
1
STEP
2
139
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installing child restraints using a seatbelt (child restraint lock
function belt)
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
Run the seatbelt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
140
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
Forward facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seatbelt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
141
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 142)
Booster seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seatbelt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 5 8 )
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
142
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seatbelt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seatbelt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint using a seatbelt or the LATCH
anchors.
Remove the anchor bracket
cover.
Store the removed cover in a safe
place.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
143
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
When installing a child restraint system with LATCH anchors and a top
tether strap
Depending on the child restraint system's size and shape, if the child
restraint system is installed to the LATCH anchors first, it may not be possi-
ble to attach the top tether strap to the anchor bracket.
In that case, first temporarily attach the top tether strap to the anchor
bracket, install the child restraint system using the lower anchors and then
tighten the top tether strap.
Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
WARNING
When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 60)
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident.
If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
144
1-7. Safety information
WARNING
When installing a child restraint system
Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seatbelt is not
twisted.
Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
When adjusting the front passenger seat position after installing a child
restraint system, do so slowly.
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seatbelt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may
cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.
When driving
2
145
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle............ 146
Push-button ignition
switch............................. 160
Engine (ignition) switch.... 169
Automatic transmission.... 172
Manual Transmission....... 179
Turn signal lever .............. 182
Parking brake................... 183
Horn ................................. 184
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ......... 185
Indicators and warning
lights .............................. 190
Multi-information
display............................ 195
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch............... 200
Fog light switch ................ 206
Windshield wipers and
washer ........................... 207
2-4. Using other driving
systems
Cruise control................... 210
Driving assist systems ..... 215
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage .......... 221
Vehicle load limits ............ 225
Winter driving tips ............ 226
Trailer towing ................... 230
Dinghy towing .................. 231
146
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
Starting the engine
P. 160, 169
Driving
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the select lever to D.
(P. 172)
Release the parking brake. (P. 183)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.
(P. 179)
Release the parking brake. (P. 183)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
With the select lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the select lever to P or N. (P. 172)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake
pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to neutral. (P. 179)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
147
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking the vehicle
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
With the select lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Shift the select lever to P. (P. 172)
Set the parking brake. (P. 183)
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
Press the push-button ignition switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake
pedal.
Shift the shift lever to neutral. (P. 179)
Set the parking brake. (P. 183)
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem:
Press the push-button ignition switch to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the
wheels as needed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
148
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting off on a steep uphill
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the select
lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
When the accelerator pedal is released
When driving on curves
When the brake pedal is firmly depressed
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
149
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
New vehicle break-in driving (the first 1000 miles [1600 km])
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you
handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions
during the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
Do not allow the engine speed to exceed 4000 rpm except in an emer-
gency.
Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,
either fast or slow.
Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine,
newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced
with new ones.
Replacement of brake pad and lining
The front disc brake and the rear disc brake have audible wear indicators on
the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows.
Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the
brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the
brake pads serviced by your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
150
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake lining
Drive the vehicle at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking
brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a force of approxi-
mately 33.7 lbf [150 N, 15.3 kgf]).
Drive the vehicle for approximately 220 yards (200 meters) in this
condition.
Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat this
procedure.
Check the parking brake lever travel. If the parking brake lever
travel is out of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting
nut located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake lever travel: P. 419
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your
SUBARU dealer perform the bedding down. (P. 149)
After the engine starts
In order to secure a rich exhaust sound when starting the vehicle and envi-
ronmental performance, air intake and exhaust sounds become loud and
vibrations may increase for a little while after the engine starts. This is not a
malfunction.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 413)
REV indicator
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
When the set engine speed is reached
the REV indicator comes on and a buzzer
sounds to inform the driver. (P. 197)
(When the engine speed enters the red
zone, the REV indicator flashes regard-
less of settings.)
151
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
WARNING
When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
Firmly depress the brake pedal because engine speed may increase
immediately after starting the engine, when the air conditioning system is
operating, when turning the steering wheel, etc., thereby causing creeping
to become stronger. Apply the parking brake as necessary.
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-
ator pedals properly.
Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll
backward while the select lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while
the select lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk lid is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle
can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer
immediately.
152
2-1. Driving procedures
WARNING
On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R
while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not shift the select lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
or shift lever to 1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is
moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not release the clutch pedal
too quickly. Doing so may propel the vehicle forward, possibly causing an
accident.
Moving the select lever to N (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or
shift lever to neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehi-
cle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine
braking is not available when N or neutral is selected.
During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 173, 179)
Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
153
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
WARNING
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in
engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
When shifting the select lever or shift lever
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the
select lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the select lever
to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of
the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious
injury.
Do not place items in the select lever’s or shift lever’s surrounding area. It
may cause incorrect operation.
If the select lever’s or shift lever’s boot is pulled out during cleaning, return
it to its previous position. If the select lever’s or shift lever’s boot is left
pulled out, the select lever or shift lever may become difficult to operate.
154
2-1. Driving procedures
WARNING
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have your SUBARU dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as
possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded. (P. 149)
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driving.
When the vehicle is stopped
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N (vehicles with an automatic
transmission only) or neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission), the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents
due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal
while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
155
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
WARNING
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
Do not attach suction cups to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Suction cups or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the select lever to P (vehicles with an
automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
156
2-1. Driving procedures
WARNING
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your SUBARU
dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle,
resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the select
lever or shift lever, or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an
accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is
parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the
vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
157
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
WARNING
When braking
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
158
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch,
transmission and gears.
Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill
grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so
may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may damage the
transmission.
When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always shift the select lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed. Also set the parking brake.
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not race the engine for
more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the
brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause
the transmission fluid to overheat.
159
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
Replacement of brake pad and lining
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake
pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or
replacement.
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear wheels to
lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly and gently.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 378)
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
Engine stalling
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your SUBARU dealer check the following:
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, differential, etc.
Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
160
2-1. Driving procedures
Push-button ignition switch (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the access key
on your person starts the engine or changes push-button ignition
switch modes.
Starting the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the select lever is set in P.
If the select lever is not set in P, the engine may not be started.
(P. 172)
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
The keyless access with push button start system indicator light
(green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the
engine cannot be started.
Press the push-button ignition
switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 10 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any push-button ignition
switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
161
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in neutral.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
The keyless access with push button start system indicator light
(green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the
engine cannot be started.
Press the push-button ignition
switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 10 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the clutch
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any push-button ignition
switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
162
2-1. Driving procedures
Stopping the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the select lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 183)
Release the brake pedal.
Press the push-button ignition switch.
Check that the keyless access with push button start sys-
tem indicator light (green) is off.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to neutral.
Set the parking brake. (P. 183)
Release the clutch pedal.
Press the push-button ignition switch.
Check that the keyless access with push button start sys-
tem indicator light (green) is off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
163
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Changing push-button ignition switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the push-button ignition switch
with the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or
clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmission) released. (The
mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The hazard warning flashers
can be used.
The keyless access with push
button start system indicator
light (green) is off.
“ACC” mode
Some electrical components
such as the power outlet can
be used.
The keyless access with push
button start system indicator
light (green) flashes slowly.
“ON” mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The keyless access with push
button start system indicator
light (green) flashes slowly.
*: Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: If the select lever
is in a position other than P
when turning off the engine, the
push-button ignition switch will
be turned to “ACC” mode, not
to off.
164
2-1. Driving procedures
When stopping the engine with the select lever in a position
other than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
If the engine is stopped with the select lever in a position other than P,
the push-button ignition switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to “ACC” mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the
switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the select lever to P.
Check that the keyless access with push button start system
indicator light (green) flashes slowly and then press the push-
button ignition switch once.
Check that the keyless access with push button start system
indicator light (green) is off.
Auto power off function
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
If the vehicle is left in “ACC” or “ON” mode (the engine is not running) for
more than an hour with the select lever in P, the push-button ignition switch
will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent bat-
tery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch
in “ACC” or “ON” mode for long periods of time when the engine is not run-
ning.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
If the vehicle is left in “ACC” or “ON” mode (the engine is not running) for
more than an hour, the push-button ignition switch will automatically turn off.
However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not
leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode
for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
165
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Operation of the push-button ignition switch
When operating the push-button ignition switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
push-button ignition switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to
press and hold the switch.
Access key battery depletion
P. 3 4
Conditions affecting operation
P. 3 0
Note for the “keyless access” entry function
P. 3 1
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 77)
Contact your SUBARU dealer.
Steering lock
After turning the push-button ignition switch off and opening and closing the
doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.
Operating the push-button ignition switch again automatically cancels the
steering lock.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission:
Check that the select lever is securely set
in P. The engine may not start if the select
lever is displaced out of P. The keyless
access with push button start system indi-
cator light (green) will flash quickly.
166
2-1. Driving procedures
When the steering lock cannot be released
Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
When the keyless access with push button start system indicator light
flashes in yellow
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the access key battery is depleted
P. 325
If the keyless access with push button start system has been deacti-
vated in a customized setting
P. 395
Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing
the battery and so forth
The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the push-button ignition switch
to “ON” mode, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling
may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a
malfunction.
The keyless access with push button start
system indicator light (green) will flash
quickly.
Vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion
Check that the select lever is set in P.
Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
167
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
WARNING
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress
the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
If the keyless access with push button start system indicator light flashes
in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering
wheel is still locked, and it may result in an accident.
Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the
steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
Stopping the engine
Do not touch the push-button ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition switch is pressed for 3 seconds or longer or
pressed 3 times successively, the engine will stop. When the engine stops,
the brake booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be
required to steer, and it may result in an accident.
168
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” mode for
long periods of time without the engine running.
If the keyless access with push button start system indicator light (green)
is illuminated, the push-button ignition switch is not off. When exiting the
vehicle, always check that the push-button ignition switch is off.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not stop the engine when the
select lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another
select lever position, the push-button ignition switch will not be turned off
but instead be turned to “ACC” mode. If the vehicle is left in “ACC” mode,
battery discharge may occur.
When starting the engine
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your SUBARU dealer immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the push-button ignition
switch
If the push-button ignition switch seems to be operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately.
169
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system)
Starting the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the select lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in neutral.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
Changing the engine switch positions
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the select
lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the power outlet can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START
For starting the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
170
2-1. Driving procedures
Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the select lever to P.
(P. 172)
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to neutral.
(P. 179)
If the engine does not start
Remove the key and try again. If the engine does not start, the engine immo-
bilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 77)
Contact your SUBARU dealer.
When the steering lock cannot be released
Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing
the battery and so forth
The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be
unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
STEP
1
Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK”
position.
STEP
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
171
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
WARNING
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An accident may
result if the engine is stopped while driving.
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods
of time without the engine running.
When starting the engine
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position
and try to start the engine again after waiting for 10 seconds or more.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by your SUBARU dealer immediately.
172
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the select lever
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button
start system
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
select lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the select lever between P and D, make sure that
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start
system
While the push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode,
move the select lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the select lever between P and D, make sure that
the vehicle is completely stopped.
: If equipped
173
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Shift position uses
*: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for
the driving conditions. Setting the select lever to the D position is rec-
ommended for normal driving.
Shift position Meter display Function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the
engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D
Normal D position driving*
(gears between “1” and “6” are
automatically selected)
(paddle shift levers activated)
Temporary manual mode driv-
ing (P. 177)
M Manual mode driving (P. 175)
174
2-1. Driving procedures
Selecting a driving mode
By pressing the driving pattern selector switch the following
modes can be selected to suit driving and usage conditions:
Normal mode
Sport mode
The “SPORT” indicator comes on.
Use sport mode for sporty driving or when driving in mountainous
regions with lots of curves.
Snow mode
The “SNOW” indicator comes on.
Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces
such as snow.
To cancel sport mode or snow mode, press the same side of the switch
again.
175
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Manual mode driving
To enter manual mode, shift the select lever to the M position.
While the upshift/downshift indicator light is illuminated, gears can be
selected by operating the select lever or paddle shift levers, allowing
you to drive in the gear of your choosing.
Even if upshifting operations are performed, if vehicle speed is too low for
the requested gear, the gear will not change.
Upshift indicator
Downshift indicator
Upshifting (+)
Downshifting (-)
Each time the select lever or
paddle shift levers are operated,
the gear changes up or down
one gear and the selected gear,
“1” through “6”, will be set.
The selected gear, from “1” to “6”,
and “M” will be displayed on the
shift position and shift range indi-
cator.
When in manual mode, the gear will not change unless the select
lever or paddle shift levers are operated.
However, even when in manual mode, the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:
When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
When engine oil temperature is high and engine speed rises close
to the red zone.
176
2-1. Driving procedures
When moving the select lever out of P
If the select lever is pushed sideways before the brake pedal is depressed,
select lever operation may not be possible. Depress the brake pedal before
shifting the select lever out of P.
Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
If downshifting operations are performed at a vehicle speed by which down-
shifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed to
enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that downshifting
cannot be performed.
When driving with cruise control activated
Downshifting can be performed even when using cruise control. After down-
shifting, the set speed continues. (P. 175, 177)
Sport mode
In sport mode, lower gears are used and gears change at a higher
engine speed.
If sport mode is changed to while the select lever is in the M position, the
“SPORT” indicator will come on but sport mode controls will not be car-
ried out. Shift the select lever to the D position.
Sport mode cannot be changed to when driving with cruise control acti-
vated.
Snow mode
To prevent slipping, 1
st
gear cannot be selected when in snow mode.
Sport mode and snow mode automatic deactivation
In the following situations, the driving mode is automatically deactivated:
When the engine is turned off after driving in sport mode or snow mode.
When cruise control is activated while driving in sport mode.
If the select lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 392
177
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped
When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is
on a slippery road, the transmission may automatically shift to 2
nd
gear for
stopping and starting off.
Temporary manual mode driving
Temporary manual mode driving will be deactivated and normal D position
driving will be returned to in the following situations:
When driving for longer than the set time (the set time differs according
to driving conditions).
When the vehicle comes to a stop.
When the accelerator pedal is continually depressed for longer than the
set time.
When the accelerator pedal is fully, or near-fully, depressed.
Temporary manual mode driving can be
changed to by operating the paddle shift
levers while the select lever is in the D
position.
When this occurs, the selected gear and
“D” are displayed on the shift position and
shift range indicator.
(When engine speed rises close to the
red zone, upshifting will be automatically
performed.)
178
2-1. Driving procedures
Adaptive control
In order to realize smoother driving while driving in D position, an appropri-
ate gear is automatically selected by limiting upshifting and performing
downshifting operations according to driver operations and driving condi-
tions.
When driving uphill, prevents unnecessary upshifting and downshifting.
When driving downhill, downshifting is performed at engine speeds
higher than usual.
When driving on curves, prevents upshifting even when accelerating.
When the brake pedal is depressed firmly, downshifting is automatically
performed, fully utilizing engine braking.
When the accelerator pedal is suddenly released, prevents upshifting.
Adaptive control operates automatically when the select lever is in the D
position. (The function is canceled when the paddle shift levers are operated
or the select lever is shifted to the M position.)
WARNING
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in
the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
To prevent incorrect operation
Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift levers.
Doing so may unintentionally move the paddle shift levers.
179
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Manual Transmission
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and
then release it slowly.
Shifting the shift lever to R
Shift the shift lever to R while
lifting up the ring section.
180
2-1. Driving procedures
Shift-up indicator
To help enable fuel-efficient driv-
ing, the shift-up indicator flashes
3 times to indicate upshift timing.
The indicator’s default setting is
off. The indicator can be turned
on/off. (
P. 188)
181
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the transmission
Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R.
Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary and the clutch
pedal is fully depressed.
Do not shift the shift lever without
depressing the clutch pedal.
182
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out.
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of
the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.
Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
183
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
Usage in winter time
P. 226
CAUTION
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while
depressing the brake pedal.
To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it
completely while pressing the button.
U.S.A. Canada
184
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(P. 65)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
185
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Analog Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Digital Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Odometer, trip meter and multi-information display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Multi-information display: Presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data. (P. 195)
186
2-2. Instrument cluster
“DISP” switch
P. 196
“ODO/TRIP” switch
P. 187
“km/h MPH” switch
Each time the switch is pressed, the display inside the meter changes
between km/h and MPH.
187
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Switch the display
Each time the “ODO/TRIP” switch is pressed, the display changes as
follows.
Odometer
Trip meter A
*1
Trip meter B
*1
Setting screen for tachometer indicator needle movement function
when starting the vehicle
*2
Setting screen for the shift position indicator and shift-up indica-
tor
*2
(vehicles with a manual transmission)
*1
:Pressing and holding the “ODO/TRIP” switch will reset the trip meter that
is currently displayed.
*2
:Only displayed when the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
(vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system), or
when the push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” mode or turned off (vehi-
cles with a keyless access with push button start system).
188
2-2. Instrument cluster
Tachometer indicator needle movement function when starting
the vehicle
When the engine switch is turned to “ON” position (vehicles without a
keyless access with push button start system), or the push-button
ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access
with push button start system), the tachometer indicator needle points
to the highest value once and then quickly returns.
Changing between activated/deactivated
Press the “ODO/TRIP” switch repeatedly until the setting
screen is displayed. (P. 187)
Each time the switch is pressed and held, the function
changes between activated/deactivated.
“S-on”: Activated
“S-oFF”: Deactivated
Setting the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator
(vehicles with a manual transmission)
Displaying of the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator can be
turned on/off.
Press the “ODO/TRIP” switch repeatedly until the setting
screen is displayed. (P. 187)
Each time the switch is pressed and held, the display changes
between on/off.
“G-on”: Display on
“G-oFF”: Display off
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
189
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the parking lights or the headlights turn on, the instrument panel lights
will dim. However, when the instrument panel brightness control dial is
turned to the up most position, the instrument panel lights will not dim even
when the parking lights or headlights turn on.
Fuel gauge
When the indicator needle is close to “E”, promptly refuel the vehicle.
The relationship between the indicator needle and the consumed amount
(remaining fuel) is not always accurate. Only use it as a reference.
When the vehicle is on an incline or curve, sudden acceleration and
stops and so forth cause the fuel inside the tank to move which may
cause the indicator needle to move up and down.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red
zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
check the engine after it has cooled completely. (
P. 403)
190
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
indicators and warning lights illuminated.
Instrument cluster
Center panel
191
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 182)
Shift position indicator
(P. 179)
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 201)
Shift-up indicator
(P. 180)
(Vehicles with a manual transmission)
(If equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 206)
Slip indicator
(P. 215)
Security indicator
(P. 77, 81)
Traction Control Sys-
tem OFF indicator light
(P. 216)
(If equipped)
Keyless access with
push button start sys-
tem indicator light
(P. 160)
Vehicle stability control
(VSC) off indicator
(P. 218)
Shift position and shift
range indicator
(P. 173)
“VSC SPORT” indicator
(P. 217)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Upshift/downshift indi-
cator (P. 175, 177)
REV indicator
(P. 150)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 174)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 210)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
“SNOW” indicator
(P. 174)
“SET” indicator
(P. 210)
(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
*
1, 2
*
1
*
1
*
1
192
2-2. Instrument cluster
*
1
: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
These lights turn on when the push-button ignition switch is turned
to “ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed.
They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*
3
: The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show
you the status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. When the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, (vehicles without a key-
less access with push button start system), or the push-button ignition
switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system), both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate
for 6 seconds during the system check. After the system check, both
the ON and OFF indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Then, either the
ON or OFF indicator illuminates depending on the condition of the
front passenger’s frontal airbag.
When the OFF indicator remains off and ON indicator illuminates, the
front passenger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. When
the OFF indicator illuminates and ON indicator remains off, the front
passenger’s frontal airbag does not deploy during a collision.
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators remain
on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles
without a keyless access with push button start system) or the push-
button ignition switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system), or the indicators remain off
after the system check, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately.
Airbag on-off indicator (P. 122)
*
3
193
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 364)
*
1
: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem
These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer for details.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
These lights turn on when the push-button ignition switch is turned
to “ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed.
They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer for details.
*
2
: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light
flashes quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not
been released.
*
3
: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada)
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
(If equipped) (If equipped)
(for driver)
(for front
passen-
ger)
(If equipped)
*
1
*
1
*
4
*
4
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
2
*
3
*
1
*
1
*
1
194
2-2. Instrument cluster
WARNING
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag system warn-
ing light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these
systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could
result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if this occurs.
*
4
: Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem
These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They
will turn off after the engine is started. There may be a malfunction
in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off.
Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for details.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
These lights turn on when the push-button ignition switch is turned
to “ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed.
They will turn off after the engine is started. There may be a mal-
function in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do
not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer for
details.
195
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data, including the current outside air temperature.
Outside temperature
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Setting screen for the REV
indicator
196
2-2. Instrument cluster
Switch the display
Each time the “DISP” switch is pressed, the display changes as fol-
lows.
Outside temperature
P. 263
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was
reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch for longer
than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
Setting screen for the REV indicator*
P. 197
*: Only displayed when the vehicle is stopped.
197
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Setting the REV indicator
Changing the REV indicator settings
The engine speed at which the REV indicator turns on at and
whether a buzzer sounds or not when the light turns on can be set.
Engine speed setting range: From 2000 to 7400 rpm (r/min)
Press the “DISP” switch repeatedly until the setting screen is
displayed. (P. 196)
Press and hold the “DISP”
switch.
“REV.” and the thousandth place
flash. After flashing, the number
changes each time the button is
pressed and held.
Press the “DISP” switch.
The hundredth place flashes.
After flashing, the number
changes each time the button is
pressed and held.
Press the “DISP” switch.
A buzzer sounds once, and setting of the engine speed value is
complete.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
198
2-2. Instrument cluster
Press and hold the “DISP”
switch.
Each time the “DISP” switch is
pressed and held, the buzzer
changes between activated and
deactivated.
”b-on”: Buzzer activated
”b-oFF”: Buzzer deactivated
When the setting changes from
“b-oFF” to “b-on”, the buzzer
sounds 3 times.
Press the “DISP” switch.
When the buzzer sounds, all settings have been completed. The set-
tings are displayed.
Deactivating the REV indicator settings
After setting the thousandth
place to “-”, press the “DISP”
switch once.
STEP
5
STEP
6
199
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
The multi-information display operate when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
WARNING
The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new shift
position number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display
changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive
engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
200
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Off
The daytime running lights
turn on.
The headlights, park-
ing, daytime running
lights and so on turn on
and off automatically.
(Vehicles without a key-
less access with push
button start system:
When the engine
switch is in the “ON”
position
Vehicles with a keyless
access with push but-
ton start system: When
the push-button igni-
tion switch is in “ON”
mode)
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate,
daytime running lights
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
the lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
201
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
202
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Manual headlight leveling dial
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the head-
lights
Lowers the level of the head-
lights
Guide to dial settings
Occupancy and luggage load conditions
Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
Driver None 0
Driver and front pas-
senger
None 0
All seats occupied None 1
All seats occupied Full luggage loading 1
Driver Full luggage loading 2
203
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Daytime running light system
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: To make your vehicle more visi-
ble to other drivers, the daytime running lights turn on automatically
whenever the engine is started, the select lever is shifted out of P and the
parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for
use at night.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: To make your vehicle more visible
to other drivers, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when-
ever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime
running lights are not designed for use at night.
Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
Headlight control sensor
Headlight control sensor is located on the
passenger's side.
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
204
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Automatic light off system
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The light switch is in , the headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the key is removed from the engine
switch. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after
all the doors are locked.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or
turn the lights off and then back to or
.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The light switch is in , the headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the push-button ignition switch is turned
off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all
the doors are locked.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON”
mode, or turn the light switch off and then back to or
.
Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position and
the driver's door is opened with the key removed from the engine switch
while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
A buzzer sounds when the push-button ignition switch is turned off or turned
to “ACC” mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.
205
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Battery-saving function
In the following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will
go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery
from being discharged:
The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
The key is removed from the engine switch (vehicles without a keyless
access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition switch
is turned off (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem).
The light switch is in , or .
This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:
When the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without a
keyless access with push button start system) or the push-button ignition
switch is turned to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push
button start system)
When the light switch is operated
When the door is opened or closed
Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 439)
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
206
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-
tions, such as in rain and fog.
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
: If equipped
207
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Windshield wipers and washer
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper
interval can be adjusted.
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
208
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
209
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
CAUTION
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
210
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator (green)
will come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
211
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment (U.S.A.): By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
the lever is operated.
Fine adjustment (Canada): By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each
time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The vehicle speed can be increased or decreased
continually until the lever is released. Then, release the lever. The vehi-
cle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
212
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control can be set when
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
The select lever is in D or M and the vehicle is in the 2
nd
gear or higher.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicles with a manual transmission
The vehicle is in the 2
nd
gear or higher.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when:
The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is
depressed (manual trans-
mission only).
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h).
213
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
Vehicle stability control (VSC) is activated.
The system may be malfunctioning when
In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your SUBARU dealer.
The cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow.
The cruise control indicator does not come on even when the “ON-OFF”
button is pressed while the engine is running.
214
2-4. Using other driving systems
WARNING
Cruise control precaution (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
You can cancel the cruise control by shifting the select lever into the N posi-
tion. However, do not shift the lever into the N position while driving except in
case of emergency. If the select lever is shifted into the N position, the
engine brake will no longer work. This could result in an accident.
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
During emergency towing
215
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
When the TRAC/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC (brake LSD
function)/Vehicle stability control
(VSC) systems are operating.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
Vehicle stability control (VSC)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-
ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
The TRAC system is also equipped with the brake LSD function.
Electric power steering
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
216
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn
the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
In this case, the brake LSD function remains on.
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the
button.
The Traction Control System OFF
indicator light will come on.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.
217
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Vehicle stability control (VSC) SPORT mode
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accom-
modate various driving preferences. The control modes can be
selected with the “VSC SPORT” switch. Normal mode allows secure
and smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed, Vehicle sta-
bility control (VSC) SPORT mode is activated. Control characteristics
such as the Vehicle stability control (VSC) and TRAC are adjusted to
afford maneuverability closer to what a driver may have imagined,
while a sense of security is retained.
Vehicle stability control (VSC)
SPORT mode/Normal mode
The “VSC SPORT” indicator and
Vehicle stability control (VSC) off
indicator come on when in Vehi-
cle stability control (VSC) SPORT
mode.
218
2-4. Using other driving systems
Turning off both TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems
To turn the TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems off, press and
hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The Traction Control System OFF indicator light and the Vehicle stability
control (VSC) off indicator light will come on.
In this case, the brake LSD function remains on.
Press the button again to turn the systems back on.
Automatic reactivation of TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) sys-
tems
After turning the TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems off, the
systems will be automatically reactivated in the following situations:
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: When
the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: When the
push-button ignition switch is turned off
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle
speed is more than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h).
If both the TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are turned
off, automatic reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases.
Automatic deactivation of Vehicle stability control (VSC) SPORT mode
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
When the engine switch is turned to “LOCK” position after driving in Vehicle
stability control (VSC) SPORT mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
When the push-button ignition switch is turned off after driving in Vehicle sta-
bility control (VSC) SPORT mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC and
Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake
pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the
vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction
has occurred in any of these systems.
219
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
Electric power steering operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Reduced effectiveness of the electric power steering system
The effectiveness of the electric power steering system is reduced to pre-
vent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over
an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.
Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle
and turn the engine off. The electric power steering system should return to
normal after a little while.
WARNING
The ABS does not operate effectively when
Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations:
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
When driving with tire chains
When driving over bumps in the road
When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
220
2-4. Using other driving systems
WARNING
TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
When the Vehicle stability control (VSC) and/or brake LSD function is
activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
When the TRAC/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force,
do not turn the TRAC/Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems off unless nec-
essary.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and Vehicle stability control (VSC) systems will not function
correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
221
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
Be sure all items are secured in place.
To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
222
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(P. 410)
SUBARU does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 699 lb. (317
kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be
as follows:
699 lb. - 366 lb. = 333 lb. (317 kg -166 kg = 151 kg)
In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of
258 lb. (117 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
333 lb. - 258 lb. = 75 lb. (151 kg - 117 kg = 34 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
223
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
WARNING
Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do
not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.
When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seatbelts prop-
erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent
the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or
hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
At the feet of the driver
On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
On the rear shelf
On the instrument panel
On the dashboard
Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
224
2-5. Driving information
WARNING
Capacity and distribution
Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
225
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Vehicle load limits
Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 315)
WARNING
Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
Total load capacity
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
Seating capacity
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Towing capacity
SUBARU does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
226
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
Engine oil
Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.
Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all
4 tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pat-
tern.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have
accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis,
around the tires or on the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes
before getting in the vehicle.
227
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
If a door is opened and closed when its side window is frozen,
the window safety device will operate and the side window
open/close function linked to door operation may not operate
correctly. If this occurs, perform the following after the ice has
melted.
Open the side window until it is approximately halfway open
with the door closed.
Fully close the window by pulling the switch up to the one-
touch closing position and continue holding the switch for 1
second or more after the window fully closes.
The window position is reset and the safety device operations will
be released.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you
and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to
road conditions.
When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold
latitudes)
Park the vehicle and move the select lever to P (automatic trans-
mission) or shift lever to 1 or R (manual transmission) without
setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, pre-
venting it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to
prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
STEP
1
STEP
2
228
2-5. Driving information
Tire chains
Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of
clearance between the tires and vehicle body.
When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction
device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehi-
cle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account
tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer's instructions, especially regarding
maximum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or
remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is
not covered under warranty.
Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class “S
device, and use it on the rear wheels only.
Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Over-
confidence because you are using a traction device could easily lead
to a serious accident.
229
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its
freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended dur-
ing cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled when-
ever the fuel level reaches half empty.
WARNING
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
Use tires of the specified size, and that are the same size, same maker,
same brand and tread pattern.
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
230
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer
towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage
that may result from trailer towing, from any trailer towing equip-
ment or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompa-
nying such equipment. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle
damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing.
231
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed behind a motor
home or other vehicle with the wheels (2 or 4) on the ground. Serious
damage can result.
232
2-5. Driving information
Interior features
3
233
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system ........................... 234
Automatic air
conditioning system ....... 241
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers....................... 250
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX/USB
port................................. 252
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ............... 253
Interior light .................... 254
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features .... 255
Glove box....................... 256
Bottle holders................. 257
Cup holders/console
tray................................. 258
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors ........................ 260
Vanity mirrors................... 261
Clock ................................ 262
Outside temperature
display............................ 263
Power outlets ................... 264
Seat heaters..................... 266
Floor mat.......................... 268
234
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system
Adjusting the settings
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “0” turns off the fan.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control
dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air
or heated air.
To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selection dial to the
desired position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can
also be selected for more delicate adjustment.
: If equipped
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air conditioning on/off button
Temperature control dial
Outside air or recirculated air mode
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
235
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Defogging the windshield
Set the air outlet selection dial to
position.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
Perform the following operations accordingly:
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature con-
trol dial.
If the dehumidification function is not operating, press
to operate the dehumidification function.
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the
air flow and temperature up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
236
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
237
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from out-
side the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air
inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
When defrosting the side win-
dows, face the right and left side
outlets toward them.
238
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Open the air outlet.
Close the air outlet.
Right and left side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
239
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
For quick cooling
Turn the temperature control dial to the “MAX A/C” position and select the
recirculated air mode.
Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effec-
tive in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is
pressed.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
Air conditioning filter
P. 322
240
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
WARNING
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
241
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets, fan speed, air inlet control and the air conditioner com-
pressor are automatically operated.
*
1
: For the driver’s side
*
2
: For the front passenger’s side
Windshield defogger
Temperature control dial*
1
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Temperature setting
display*
1
Off
Automatic
mode
Dual operation button
Changes the air outlets used
Air conditioning on/off button
Temperature control dial*
2
Temperature setting
display*
2
Fan speed control dial
Fan speed/Air
outlet display
: If equipped
242
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press .
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets,
fan speed, air inlet control and the air conditioner compressor
are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Turn temperature control dial clockwise to increases the tem-
perature and turn temperature control dial counterclockwise to
decreases the temperature on the drivers side.
When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the pas-
senger’s side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for
the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
STEP
1
STEP
2
243
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings manually
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock-
wise (increase) or counter-clock wise (decrease).
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature settings, turn the temperature con-
trol dial clockwise (warm) or counter-clock wise (cool).
To adjust the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool) on the passenger side to separately adjust the tem-
perature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode).
Press (the indicator on turns off) to return the driver
and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous
mode).
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simulta-
neous modes each time is pressed.
To change the air outlets, press .
The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button
is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
244
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The dehumidification function
operates and fan speed
increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode button to outside air mode
if the recirculated air mode is
used. (It may switch automati-
cally.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press
again when the
windshield is defogged.
245
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air outlets and air flow
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
If the recirculated air mode is
used, it may automatically switch
to the outside air mode.
246
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Switching between outside air mode and recirculated air mode
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
When defrosting the side win-
dows, face the right and left side
outlets toward them.
247
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Open the air outlet.
Close the air outlet.
Right and left side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
248
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after is pressed.
Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
If you turn
off, the windows may fog up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the
outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is
effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. Dur-
ing cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the
vehicle interior effectively.
Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
is
pressed.
249
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
Air conditioning filter
P. 322
WARNING
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
250
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The out-
side rear view mirror defoggers* are used to remove frost, dew or
raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
*: Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
251
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
The defoggers can be operated when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
The outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view
mirror defoggers)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
When continuous operation is set (vehicles with an automatic air con-
ditioning system)
During continuous operation, the defogger stops operating for 2 minutes
after every 15 minutes of continual operation. Even during the 2 minutes that
operation stops, the operating light remains illuminated. The rear window
defogger will continue to operate in this cycle until it is turned off.
Customization that can be configured at SUBARU dealer (vehicles with
an automatic air conditioning system)
The rear window defogger can be set to 15-minute operation or continuous
operation. (Customizable features P. 439)
WARNING
When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with out-
side rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
252
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX/USB port
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume and sound quality can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio
controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device
itself.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the battery power source of the por-
table audio device to reduce noise.
: If equipped
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
 
For more information, please refer to the “Navigation System
Owner's Manual”.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
253
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Interior light (P. 254)
Engine switch light (vehicles without a keyless access with push
button start system)
Push-button ignition switch light (vehicles with a keyless access
with push button start system)
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
254
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior light
Turns the light off
Turns light on when door is
open
Turns the light on
Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/
closed.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to push-button ignition switch
mode, the presence of the access key, whether the doors are locked/
unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
To prevent battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed, the lights
will go off automatically after 20 minutes:
Interior light (when the switch is in the
“DOOR” position)
Engine switch light (vehicles without a keyless access with push button
start system)
Push-button ignition switch light (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system)
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)
Customization that can be configured at your SUBARU dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features
P. 439)
Interior light
255
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
WARNING
Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Glove box
Bottle holders
Cup holders/console tray
256
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box
Pull up the lever to open the
glove box.
WARNING
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
glove box or the items stored inside.
Glove box
257
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Bottle holders
When using the bottle holder
When storing a bottle, close the cap.
The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
WARNING
Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a PET bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders
258
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders/console tray
Changing the cup holder position
Changing the console tray size
Remove the cup holder and change the
holder position.
Remove the cup holder.
Cup holders/console tray
259
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
WARNING
Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Before driving, place the cup holder in the rear position so that it does not
hinder select lever or shift lever operation.
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
When placing the cup holder, make
sure it is facing the correct direction.
Failure to do so will cause the cup
holder to not be secure in the console
tray and hinder select lever or shift
lever operation.
Cup holders/console tray
260
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
261
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge (vehicles with vanity lights)
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.
Open the cover to use.
Vehicles with vanity lights: The
light turns on when the cover is
opened.
262
3-5. Other interior features
Clock
The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The clock data will be reset.
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Rounds to the nearest
hour
*
*: e.g.1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
00
263
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 12 mph
[20 km/h])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “- -” is displayed more than 1 minute or the outside temperature
is not displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your SUBARU
dealer.
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of
-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).
The outside temperature dis-
play can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” switch.
(P. 196)
264
3-5. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on 10 A
or less.
In the console tray
In the glove box
265
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The push-button ignition switch is in “ACC” or “ON” mode.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
266
3-5. Other interior features
Seat heaters
The seat heaters can be used when
The push-button ignition switch is in “ON” mode.
When not in use
Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off.
: If equipped
Press the switch to warm the
seats.
The indicator light comes on
when a seat heater is turned
on.
Rapid heating
Normal heating
267
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
WARNING
Burns
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
CAUTION
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.
268
3-5. Other interior features
Floor mat
: If equipped
Make sure to only use floor mats that are specifically designed for
use with the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them
securely in place on top of the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration. For details on the fixing procedure, refer to the instructions
supplied with the floor mat.
STEP
1
STEP
2
*
269
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
When installing the driver's floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are SUBARU Genuine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
With the engine stopped and the select
lever in P (automatic transmission) or
shift lever in neutral (manual transmis-
sion), fully depress each pedal to the
floor to make sure it does not interfere
with the floor mat.
270
3-5. Other interior features
Maintenance and care
4
271
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior......... 272
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.......... 276
Cleaning and protecting
the Alcantara
®
area ....... 280
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements.................. 282
General maintenance....... 285
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................ 288
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .................... 289
Engine hood..................... 292
Engine compartment........ 294
Tires ................................. 308
Tire inflation pressure ...... 315
Wheels ............................. 319
Air conditioning filter......... 322
Transmitter/access key
battery............................ 325
Checking and replacing
fuses .............................. 329
Light bulbs........................ 337
272
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Handling the antenna
Before washing the vehicle, the antenna can be removed.
Removal
Installation
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition.
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
273
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Automatic car washes
Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle.
Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the
antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.
When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type to avoid scratches to the
vehicle surface and harm to your vehicle’s paint.
Vehicles with a rear spoiler: In certain automatic car washes, the rear
spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehi-
cle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
High pressure car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows and door frames as water may enter the cabin.
Before car wash, check that the fuel filler lid on your vehicle is closed
properly.
Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Parts containing resin such as the bumper
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
274
4-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
When washing the vehicle
Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If water
enters the engine air intake or electrical parts it will cause engine trouble or
a malfunction of the power steering.
When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake
stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a
safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to
become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers
until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear
bumper diffusers can cause burns.
CAUTION
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
Protective film for side sill plates
Make sure to remove the protective film. Failure to do so may cause rust,
depending on conditions.
275
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
Antenna installation and removal precautions
Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side
wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning
the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
To prevent damage to the antenna
Remove the antenna in the following situations:
When the antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage or other such places
When a car cover is to be used to cover the vehicle
When using an automatic car wash
276
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
When the interior is extremely dirty, wipe away the dirt using a
soft cloth slightly dampened with diluted neutral detergent.
Cleaning the leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
Synthetic leather areas
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather.
Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
277
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Caring for leather areas
SUBARU recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a
year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-
ble.
Seatbelts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
WARNING
Water in the vehicle
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 92)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
278
4-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or
alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor
the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
Do not use a chemical agent containing silicone (highly-polymerized sili-
con compound) when cleaning any of the electrical appliances such as the
air conditioning, all switches and their surrounding areas.
If silicon (highly-polymerized silicon compound) contacts these compo-
nents, it may cause the electrical appliances to malfunction.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
Remove any dust, dirt, sand, oil spots etc. on leather surfaces immedi-
ately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
279
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
When cleaning the instrument panel
When small grains of sand and so forth have gotten into instrument panel’s
surface and cannot be wiped away using a cloth, use a clay bar without add-
ing water. Forcibly trying to wipe the surface clean with a brush or sponge
may scratch the surface or fragments of the cloth may be left in the surface.
280
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara
®
area
: If equipped
The following procedures will protect and keep your vehicle’s
Alcantara
®
upholstery in top condition:
Day-to-day cleaning
Perform the following procedures regularly (approximately once
a month).
Wipe the entire Alcantara
®
area with a soft cloth that has
been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 104°F
[40°C]) and squeezed out.
Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Alcantara
®
uphol-
stery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth.
Once dry, brush the area with a soft brush.
Liquid stains
If liquid is spilled, lightly pat the area with a tissue paper or
similar to soak up the liquid.
When mud, coffee, etc., has dried on the Alcantara
®
uphol-
stery, remove it by lightly brushing the area with a soft brush
or similar.
We recommend using a vacuum cleaner to clean up the area after
the above has been performed.
When a stain cannot be removed using the above procedures,
remove it by performing the following:
Lightly wipe the stained area from the outside to the inside
from multiple angles with a soft cloth that has been damp-
ened with lukewarm water (approximately 104°F [40°C])
and squeezed out.
Do not wipe the area so strongly that it causes the Alcantara
®
upholstery surface to become uneven. Also, prepare a clean
cloth, and always use a clean area of the cloth.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
281
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
When removing dirt or dust from the Alcantara
®
areas
Remove dirt or dust from the Alcantara
®
areas by lighting brushing with a
soft brush. If this does not remove the dirt or dust, remove it using adhesive
tape.
CAUTION
When soaking up spilled liquids
Do not press down too firmly with the cloth, tissue paper etc., as doing so
may cause the liquid to further penetrate the material, making soaking up
the liquid more difficult.
If the Alcantara
®
upholstery surface becomes uneven,
lightly brush it with a soft brush.
Allow the surface to dry completely.
Oil stains
You will need the following items:
A cloth that has been dampened with benzene
A dry cloth
Using a dry cloth or tissue paper, wipe away as much of the
oil as possible to prevent the stained area from expanding.
After patting the area from the outside to the inside from
multiple angles using the cloth dampened with benzene,
soak up the oil and benzene that floats up by patting the
area with a dry cloth.
If the Alcantara
®
upholstery surface becomes uneven,
lightly brush it with a soft brush.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
282
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine SUBARU parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-SUBARU parts are used in replacement
or if a repair shop other than a SUBARU dealer performs repairs, warranty
coverage may be affected.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. SUBARU recommends the following maintenance.
General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by your-
self or by a SUBARU dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the
maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of SUBARU Service Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
283
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a SUBARU dealer
SUBARU technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your SUBARU dealer will promptly
take care of it.
284
4-2. Maintenance
WARNING
If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or
death.
Warning in handling of battery
Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cig-
arettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or
electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and
explosive.
For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield
your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery.
Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery
fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes,
immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help
immediately if acid has entered the eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount
of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.
To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other
metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery termi-
nal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in con-
tact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit
will result.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
Charge the battery in a wellventilated area.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
285
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery
Check the connections.
(P. 302)
Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 300)
Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 298)
Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 295)
Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 300)
Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 306)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be
brought to the attention of your SUBARU dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
286
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the select lever
in P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clear-
ance and correct amount of free
play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when
applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Clutch pedal • Moves smoothly?
Head restraints
• Move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seatbelts
• Does the seatbelt system oper-
ate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
287
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Door/trunk lid Operate smoothly?
Engine hood The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
Is there any leakage after park-
ing?
Tire
Inflation pressure is correct?
Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
Wheel nuts are not loose?
WARNING
If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
288
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your SUBARU dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-test-
ing.
289
4
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 302)
•Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Distilled water
Brake fluid level (P. 300)
FMVSS No.116 fresh DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 298)
SUBARU Super Coolant or simi-
lar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
SUBARU Super Coolant is pre-
mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level (P. 295)
SUBARU approved engine oil or
equivalent
Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (P. 329)
Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
290
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Light bulbs (P. 337)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
Radiator and condenser
(P. 300)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 315)
Tire pressure gauge
Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 306)
• Water washer fluid containing anti-
freeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
291
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
When working in the engine compartment
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system: Be sure the
engine switch is off. With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric
cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or
the coolant temperature is high. (P. 300)
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Be sure the
push-button ignition switch is off. With the push-button ignition switch in
“ON” mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air
conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 300)
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
CAUTION
If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-
ment.
292
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the engine
hood.
Pull the engine hood release
lever.
The engine hood will pop up
slightly.
Push the auxiliary catch lever
to the left and lift the engine
hood.
Hold the engine hood open by
inserting the supporting rod
into the slot.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
293
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
WARNING
Pre-driving check
Check that the engine hood is fully closed and locked.
If the engine hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in
motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
When opening the engine hood
Do not lift up or operate the wipers. Doing so may cause the engine hood
and wipers to contact, scratching the engine hood.
When closing the engine hood
Do not apply excessive weight or force when closing the engine hood as
doing so may result in damage.
294
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Battery (P. 302)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 295)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 300)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 296)
Washer fluid tank
(P. 306)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 300)
Radiator (P. 300)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 298)
Fuse box (P. 329)
295
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
When checking the oil, look at both sides of the dipstick and use the
lower measurement to determine the level of oil.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
296
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil
selection
P. 414
Oil quantity
(Low Full)
1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
297
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine oil consumption
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600
miles (1000 km), contact your SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground.
Call your SUBARU dealer, service station or auto parts store for informa-
tion concerning recycling or disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
298
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
CAUTION
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you fill the oil.
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your SUBARU dealer pressure test the cap
and check for leaks in the cooling system.
299
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Coolant selection
Only use SUBARU Super Coolant or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid technology.
SUBARU Super Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
CAUTION
When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint.
300
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer.
Brake fluid
Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
“MAX”
“MIN”
WARNING
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
301
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid
Items
Clean funnel
Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
WARNING
When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
CAUTION
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
302
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Hold-down clamp
Ter minal s
Checking battery fluid
Check that the level is between
“UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER
LEVEL”.
“UPPER LEVEL”
“LOWER LEVEL”
If the fluid level is at or below
“LOWER LEVEL”, add distilled
water.
303
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Adding distilled water
Remove the vent plug.
Add distilled water.
If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by
looking directly at the cell.
Put the vent plug back on and close securely.
Low O.K.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
304
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
Unlocking the doors using the keyless access with push button start sys-
tem may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If
this happens, use the remote keyless entry system or the mechanical
key to lock/unlock the doors.
Start the engine with the push-button ignition switch in “ACC” mode. The
engine may not start with the push-button ignition switch turned off. How-
ever, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.
The push-button ignition switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the
battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the push-button ignition
switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected.
Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take extra
care when connecting the battery if the push-button ignition switch mode
prior to discharge is unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
305
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
WARNING
Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
306
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If the washer fluid level is at
“LOW”, add washer fluid.
CAUTION
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
When adding distilled water
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-
sion.
Using the gauge
The washer fluid level can be checked by
observing the position of the level on the
liquid-covered holes in the gauge.
If the level falls below the second hole
from the bottom (the “LOW” position),
refill the washer fluid.
CTH43AS134
Current
fluid level
307
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
WARNING
When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
CAUTION
Washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
308
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, SUBARU rec-
ommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
The tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped)
Your SUBARU is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to
detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(P. 367)
Front
309
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles
with a tire pressure monitoring system)
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire
pressure monitoring system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your SUBARU
dealer. (P. 310)
310
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering ID codes (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system)
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your SUBARU dealer.
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your SUBARU dealer.
Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system)
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly.
After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes
on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
311
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
Tire types
1Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use
year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 226)
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (
P. 4 11 )
312
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Initializing the tire pressure monitoring system (if equipped)
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system)
The tire pressure monitoring system does not replace routine tire infla-
tion pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part
of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
Tire pressure monitoring system certification (if equipped)
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMVC010
Receiver: HYQ23AAA (vehicles without a keyless access with push
button start system)
HYQ23AAE (vehicles with a keyless access with push but-
ton start system)
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
313
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
WARNING
Tire pressure monitoring system operation (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system may not provide warning immedi-
ately if a tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4
tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern.
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by SUBARU.
Only use radial tires.
Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
CAUTION
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with a tire pressure moni-
toring system)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your SUBARU dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
314
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as
soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 309)
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
Low profile tires and wheels (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the wheel
when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to
the following:
Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
315
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis-
played on the tire and loading information label. (P. 420)
316
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended
levels, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
317
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
Reduced fuel efficiency
Reduced driving comfort and tire life
Reduced safety
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride
and handling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal
for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
318
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
CAUTION
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have
been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
319
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at your SUBARU dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
SUBARU does not recommend using:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
Use only SUBARU wheel nuts and wrenches designed for
use with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
Use only SUBARU genuine balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
320
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system)
The wheels of your SUBARU are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure monitoring system to
provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must be installed. (P. 309)
WARNING
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
When installing the wheel nuts
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered portion
321
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
(vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system)
Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure
to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
SUBARU dealer.
Ensure that only genuine SUBARU wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
322
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button
start system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start
system
Turn the push-button ignition switch off.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
323
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Pull out the glove box and dis-
connect the lower claws.
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
324
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
CAUTION
When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
325
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Transmitter/access key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a keyless access
with push button start system), or CR1632 (vehicles with a
keyless access with push button start system)
Replacing the battery (vehicles without a keyless access
with push button start system)
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
To prevent the buttons from
being disassembled, face the
button surface downward.
Remove the module.
STEP
1
STEP
2
326
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape and
remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
Replacing the battery (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a keyless access with push button
start system) or CR1632 (vehicles with a keyless access with push but-
ton start system) lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at your SUBARU dealer, local electrical
appliance shops or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
The keyless access with push button start system (if equipped) and
remote keyless entry system will not function properly.
The operational range will be reduced.
When putting the module back (vehicles without a keyless access with
push button start system)
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
Insert the module from directly above.
Inserting it on an angle may prevent the
key buttons from operating properly.
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
CAUTION
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
329
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button
start system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start
system
Turn the push-button ignition switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
Instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP
1
STEP
2
330
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 332) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
331
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your SUBARU dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your SUBARU dealer.
332
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1
MIR HTR 7.5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
2
RDI 25 A Electric cooling fan
3
(PUSH-AT) 7.5 A Engine control unit
4 ABS NO. 1 40 A ABS
5 HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system
6
WASHER 10 A Windshield washer
7
WIPER 30 A Windshield wipers
8
RR DEF 30 A Rear window defogger
9
(RR FOG) 10 A
10 D FR DOOR 25 A Power window (driver’s side)
11 (CDS) 25 A Electric cooling fan
12
D-OP 25 A
13
ABS NO. 2 25 A ABS
14
D FL DOOR 25 A Power window (passenger’s side)
15
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
333
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
16
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
17
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
18
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
19
SPARE See note. Spare fuse
20 SPARE See note. Spare fuse
21
ST 7.5 A Starting system
22
ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
23
(STR LOCK) 7.5 A Steering lock system
24
D/L 20 A Power door lock
25
ETCS 15 A Engine control unit
26 (AT+B) 7.5 A Transmission
27 (AM2 NO. 2) 7.5 A
Keyless access with push button
start system
28
EFI (CTRL) 15 A Engine control unit
29
EFI (HTR) 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
30
EFI (IGN) 15 A Starting system
31
EFI (+B) 7.5 A Engine control unit
32 HAZ 15 A
Turn signal lights, hazard warning
flashers
33 MPX-B 7.5 A
Automatic air conditioning system,
gauge and meters
34
F/PMP 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
35
IG2 MAIN 30 A
SRS airbag system, engine control
unit
36
DCC 30 A
Interior light, remote keyless entry
system, main body ECU
Fuse Ampere Circuit
334
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Note
One of each of the following spare fuses are provided: 7.5 A, 10 A, 15
A, 20 A, 25 A, 30 A.
37
HORN NO. 2 7.5 A Horn
38
HORN NO. 1 7.5 A Horn
39
H-LP LH LO 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
40
H-LP RH LO 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
41 H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
42
H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
43
INJ 30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
44
H-LP WASHER 30 A
45
AM2 NO. 1 40 A Starting system, engine control unit
46
EPS 80 A Electric power steering
47 A/B MAIN 15 A SRS airbag system
48 ECU-B 7.5 A
Remote keyless entry system,
main body ECU
49
DOME 20 A Interior light
50
IG2 7.5 A Engine control unit
Fuse Ampere Circuit
335
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1
ECU ACC 10 A
Main body ECU, outside rear view
mirrors
2
P/POINT No.2 15 A Power outlet
3
PANEL 10 A Illumination
4
TAIL 10 A Tail lights
5
DRL 10 A Daytime running light system
6
STOP 7.5 A Stop lights
7
OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
8 HEATER-S 7.5 A Air conditioning system
9
HEATER 10 A Air conditioning system
10 FR FOG LH 10 A Left-hand front fog light
11
FR FOG RH 10 A Right-hand front fog light
12 BK/UP LP 7.5 A Back-up lights
13
ECU IG1 10 A ABS, electric power steering
14 AM1 7.5 A Starting system
15
AMP 15 A
16 AT UNIT 15 A Transmission
17
GAUGE 7.5 A
Gauge and meters, keyless access
with push button start system
18 ECU IG2 10 A Engine control unit
19
SEAT HTR LH 10 A Left-hand seat heater
20 SEAT HTR RH 10 A Right-hand seat heater
21
RADIO 7.5 A
22 P/POINT No.1 15 A Power outlet
336
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
After a fuse is replaced
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 337)
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer.
If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
WARNING
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
Always use a genuine SUBARU fuse or equivalent.
Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
CAUTION
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
SUBARU dealer.
337
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Preparing a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 421)
Front bulb locations
Front side
marker lights
Front turn signal lights
Front fog lights (if equipped)
338
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear bulb locations
Inside bulb locations
Rear turn signal lights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
License
plate
lights
Interior light
Vanity lights
(if equipped)
339
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replacing light bulbs
Front turn signal lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
3
STEP
2
STEP
3
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Front side marker lights
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point
that allows your hand to easily fit
between the tire and fender liner.
Remove the clips and partly
remove the fender liner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Release the light's claw.
Insert the screwdriver into the
hole. While firmly pushing the
screwdriver forward, move it
towards the inside of the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
wrap the tip of the screwdriver
with a tape.
Pull out the lamp and turn the
lens counterclockwise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
341
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the light to
be replaced.
Remove the clips and partly
remove the fender liner.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
342
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
343
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Rear side marker lights
Remove a clip and partly remove
the cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
344
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear turn signal lights
Remove a clip and partly remove
the cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
345
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Back-up lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
3
STEP
2
STEP
3
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
License plate lights
Remove the trunk lid panel cover
clips and partly remove the trunk
lid panel cover.
To prevent damage to the vehicle,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Interior light
Remove the lens.
To prevent damage to the interior
light, cover the tip of the screw-
driver with a rag.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Vanity lights (if equipped)
Open the cover and remove the
lens.
To prevent damage to the vanity
light, cover the tip of the screw-
driver with a rag.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your SUBARU dealer.
Headlight high and low beams
Parking lights
Daytime running lights
Stop/tail lights
High mounted stoplight
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your SUBARU dealer for more information in the following situa-
tions. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens
does not indicate a malfunction.
Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on,
or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal
power is restored.
LED light bulbs
The parking lights, daytime running lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted
stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your
vehicle to your SUBARU dealer to have the light replaced.
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing light bulbs
SUBARU recommends that you use genuine SUBARU products designed
for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent over-
load, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unus-
able.
Removing and installing the luggage trim cover and trunk lid panel
cover clip
WARNING
Replacing light bulbs
Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
When changing the back-up lights
Stop the engine and wait until the exhaust pipe has cooled sufficiently. The
lights are located near the exhaust pipe and touching a hot exhaust pipe can
cause burns.
Removing
Installing
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
WARNING
Discharge headlights
Contact your SUBARU dealer before replacing the discharge headlights
(including light bulbs).
Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the head-
lights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 25000 V will be discharged and could result
in serious injury or death by electric shock.
Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight
bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When trouble arises
5
353
5-1. Essential information
Hazard warning
flashers .......................... 354
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................ 355
If you think something
is wrong ......................... 362
Fuel pump shut off
system ........................... 363
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ....................... 364
If you have a flat tire......... 378
If the engine will not
start................................ 389
If the select lever cannot
be shifted from P............ 392
If you lose your keys ........ 393
If the access key does
not operate properly....... 394
If the battery is
discharged ..................... 398
If your vehicle
overheats ....................... 403
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................. 406
354
5-1. Essential information
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers
If the hazard warning flashers are used for a long time while the engine is
not operating, the battery may discharge.
The hazard warning flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will
flash. To turn them off, press
the switch once again.
5
When trouble arises
355
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet to move the vehicle to a safe location or to free a stuck
vehicle from sand or snow. This should only be attempted on hard
surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing
eyelet may be used.
Towing eyelet
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service, using a flat
bed truck.
The vehicle must be secured properly with safety chains. Each
safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not
to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
356
5-1. Essential information
Before emergency towing
Release the parking brake.
Shift the select lever to N (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
or shift lever to neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission).
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system:
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine
running) position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system: Turn
the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”
(engine running) mode.
WARNING
Caution while towing
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always
be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
357
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelet
Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.
Front
CAUTION
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission in emergency
towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the transmission.
To prevent damage to the vehicle
When towing this vehicle, make sure to observe the following:
Do not use a wire rope
Keep vehicle speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) and do not tow for dis-
tances over 19 miles (30 km)
Tow the vehicle in the forward direction
Do not apply rope to the vehicle's suspension and so forth
Do not tow another vehicle, boat (trailer) and so forth.
When towing down a long slope
Use a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck.
STEP
1
358
5-1. Essential information
Rear
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by
hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
STEP
2
STEP
3
Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 378
5
When trouble arises
359
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
WARNING
Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This
may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
After towing
Always remove the towing eyelet. Failure to do so can cause the SRS air-
bags to not operate correctly in the event of a frontal collision.
CAUTION
To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
360
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck is not recommended
If a flat bed truck is not available, observe the following precautions to pre-
vent damage to the drive train or body.
From the front
From the rear
Never tow a vehicle from the front with
the rear wheels on the ground.Use a tow-
ing dolly under the rear wheels.
Ensure that the front lower body compo-
nents have adequate clearance to pre-
vent contact with the road surface under
all conditions.
Vehicles without a keyless access with
push button start system: Turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” position so that the
steering wheel is unlocked.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push
button start system: Turn the push-button
ignition switch to “ACC” mode so that the
steering wheel is unlocked.
5
When trouble arises
361
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
362
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
Visible symptoms
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
Audible symptoms
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
363
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
CAUTION
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
364
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your SUBARU dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
365
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system;
The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS airbag system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The seatbelt pretensioner system;
The front passenger occupant detection system.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS;
The brake assist system.
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the electric power steering sys-
tem.
(Flashes in
yellow for 15
seconds.)
Keyless access with push button start system indicator
light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the keyless access with push
button start system.
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
The Vehicle stability control (VSC) system;
The TRAC system
366
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(Comes on in
yellow)
Cruise control indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
SRS airbag system warning light
P. 120
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
The electric power steering warning light may come on and the warning
buzzer may sound when the voltage is low or the voltage drops.
WARNING
When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
When trouble arises
367
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
Indicates that a door or the
trunk lid is not fully closed.
Check that both side doors
and the trunk lid are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Remaining fuel
(Approximately 1.8 gal.
[7.0 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.] or
less)
Refuel the vehicle.
(On the instru-
ment cluster)
Drivers seatbelt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*1
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seatbelt.
Fasten the seatbelt.
(On the center
panel)
Front passengers seatbelt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*2
Warns the front passenger
to fasten his or her seatbelt.
Fasten the seatbelt.
368
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1
: Driver’s seatbelt buzzer:
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start system
The driver’s seatbelt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seatbelt
is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20
km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seatbelt is still unfastened after 30
seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the
seatbelt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20
more seconds.
Tire pressure warning
light (if equipped)
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
Natural causes (P. 369)
Flat tire (P. 378)
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after
a few minutes. In case the
light does not turn off
even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted,
have the system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
When the light comes on
after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute:
Malfunction in the tire pres-
sure monitoring system
(P. 371)
Have the system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature warning
light (if equipped)
Indicates that the auto-
matic transmission fluid
temperature is too high.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and shift the select
lever to P.
If the light goes off after a lit-
tle while, the vehicle can be
driven. If the light does not
go off, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
369
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system
The driver’s seatbelt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seatbelt
is not fastened. Once the push-button ignition switch is turned to “ON”
mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seatbelt is still unfastened
after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then,
if the seatbelt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for
20 more seconds.
*2
: Front passengers seatbelt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seatbelt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger
that his or her seatbelt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehi-
cle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seatbelt is still unfastened
after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then,
if the seatbelt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for
20 more seconds.
Low fuel level warning light
When the vehicle is on an incline, curve and so forth, the fuel inside the tank
moves, which may cause the warning light to come on early.
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seatbelt reminder
and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and warning
buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
When the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-
ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
370
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare
tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few min-
utes.
If the tire pressure monitoring system is inoperative (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system will be disabled in the following con-
ditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used.
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
If the tire inflation pressure is 55 psi (380 kPa, 3.87 kgf/cm
2
or bar) or
higher.
The tire pressure monitoring system may be disabled in the following
conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
If non-genuine SUBARU wheels are used. (Even if you use SUBARU
wheels, the tire pressure monitoring system may not work properly
with some types of tires.)
If tire chains are used.
5
When trouble arises
371
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for approximately one minute (if equipped)
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for
approximately one minute when the push-button ignition switch is turned
to “ON” mode (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem) or the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without
a keyless access with push button start system), have it checked your
SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the tire pressure warning light comes on (if equipped)
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring system)
The tire pressure monitoring system may not activate immediately.
372
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driv-
ing on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illu-
minated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
5
When trouble arises
373
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION
Precaution when installing a different tire (vehicles with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system)
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure monitoring system may not operate properly.
374
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
Continuous
Continuous
(Flashes
in yellow)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission:
The access key was carried
outside the vehicle and the
driver’s door was opened
and closed while any shift
position other than P was
selected without turning off
the push-button ignition
switch.
Change the
shift position
to P.
Bring the
access key
back into the
vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
375
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
3 times
(Flashes
in yellow)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission:
The access key was carried
outside the vehicle and the
driver’s door was opened
and closed while the shift
position P was selected with-
out turning off the push-but-
ton ignition switch.
Vehicles with a manual trans-
mission:
The access key was carried
outside the vehicle and the
driver’s door was opened
and closed while the shift
position neutral was selected
without turning off the push-
button ignition switch.
Turn the
push-button
ignition switch
off or bring
the access
key back into
the vehicle.
Once
3 times
(Flashes
in yellow)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the push-button ignition
switch in any mode other
than off and the access key
outside of the detection area.
Confirm the
location of the
access key.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
376
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
Continuous
(10 seconds)
(Flashes
in yellow)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle with the access
key and lock the doors with-
out first turning the push-but-
ton ignition switch off.
Turn the
push-button
ignition switch
off and lock
the doors
again.
Once
(Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
Indicates that the access key
is not present when attempt-
ing to start the engine.
Confirm the
location of the
access key.
Intermit-
tently (7
sec-
onds)
(Flashes
in yellow)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
An attempt was made to
drive when the regular key
was not inside the vehicle.
Confirm that
the access
key is inside
the vehicle.
Once
(Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
Indicates that the access key
battery is low.
Replace the
battery.
(P. 325)
Once
(Flashes
quickly in
green for
15 sec-
onds.)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
Indicates that the steering
lock has not been released.
Release the
steering lock.
(P. 166)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
377
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once
(Flashes
in yellow
for 15
seconds.)
Keyless access with push
button start system indica-
tor light
The access key could not be
detected in the vehicle even
after the push-button ignition
switch was pressed once.
Vehicles with
an automatic
transmission:
Touch the
access key to
the push-but-
ton ignition
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
Vehicles with
a manual
transmission:
Touch the
access key to
the push-but-
ton ignition
switch while
depressing
with the
clutch pedal.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
378
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the select lever to P (vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission) or shift lever to R (vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion).
Stop the engine.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Jack handle
Spare tire
Towing eyelet
Screwdriver
Wheel nut
wrench
5
When trouble arises
379
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Remove the luggage mat.
Remove the cover and loosen
the center fastener that secures
the spare tire.
STEP
1
STEP
2
380
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Vehicles with steel wheels:
Remove the wheel ornament.
Using a flathead screwdriver,
release the wheel ornament’s
claws in the order shown in the
illustration.
To prevent damage to the wheel
and wheel ornament, cover the
tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
STEP
1
Flat tire
Wheel
chock posi-
tions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
381
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
382
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand
to approximately the same
amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into
loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m)
STEP
1
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
383
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
The compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 420)
When using the compact spare tire (vehicles with a tire pressure
monitoring system)
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the light remains on.
If you have a flat rear tire
Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the fol-
lowing steps.
Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of
the vehicle.
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
384
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure mon-
itoring system)
The tire pressure monitoring system must be reset. (P. 309)
Storing the tire
Always install the center fastener as shown in the illustration below.
Compact spare tire
Except compact spare tire
Installing the wheel ornament (vehicles with steel wheels)
After installing “A” as shown in the illus-
tration, push the center ornament claws
in the order shown in the illustration
using a flathead screwdriver.
To prevent damage to the wheel and
wheel ornament, cover the tip of the
flathead screwdriver with a rag.
5
When trouble arises
385
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to
the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
386
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Replacing a flat tire
Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 89 ft•lbf (120
N•m, 12.2 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-
cally designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut
threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by
your SUBARU dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (P. 320)
5
When trouble arises
387
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
When using the compact spare tire
Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for
use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shift-
ing operations that cause sudden engine braking.
Install the compact spare tire on a front wheel.
When storing the compact spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact
spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
ABS & brake assist
Vehicle stability control (VSC)
TRAC
Electric power steering
Navigation system (if equipped)
Cruise control
LSD (if equipped)
388
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your SUBARU dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as
soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 309)
Stowing the jack
When stowing the jack in the jack holder, make sure that the part that the
jack handle attaches to is pointing towards the inside of the trunk. Failure
to do so may damage the vehicle body.
5
When trouble arises
389
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P. 160, 169), consider each of the following
points.
The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 160, 169)
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 77)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 398)
The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over. (vehicles with a key-
less access with push button start system)
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-
ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 390)
390
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with a keyless access with
push button start system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the push-button ignition
switch is functioning normally:
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Set the parking brake.
Put the select lever in P.
Set the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode.
Press and hold the push-button ignition switch about 15 sec-
onds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 398)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehi-
cles with a keyless access with push button start system)
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
391
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in neutral.
Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode.
Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for about 15
seconds while depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal
firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
392
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the select lever cannot be shifted from P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
If the select lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the select lever). Have the vehicle inspected
by your SUBARU dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the select lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system: Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem: Turn the push-button ignition switch to “ACC” mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent.
Press the shift lock release
button.
The select lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
393
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your SUBARU dealer. For vehi-
cles without a keyless access with push button start system, bring a
master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
For vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system,
bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key number
plate.
394
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the access key does not operate properly (vehicles with a keyless access with push button start system)
Unlocking and locking the doors, unlocking the trunk lid
Use the mechanical key built in to the access keys to operate the
doors and trunk lid. (P. 21)
Vehicles with an alarm: An alarm will sound if the alarm is set when the
trunk lid or doors are unlocked. (P. 81)
Doors
Locks driver’s door
Unlocks driver’s door
Trunk lid
Turn the mechanical key clock-
wise to open.
If communication between the access key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 30) or the access key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the keyless access with push button start system and
remote keyless entry system cannot be used. In such cases, the
doors and trunk lid can be opened or the engine can be started by
following the procedure below.
5
When trouble arises
395
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Ensure that the select lever is in P and firmly depress the
brake pedal.
Touch the SUBARU emblem
side of the access key to the
push-button ignition switch.
When the access key is detected,
a buzzer sounds and the push-
button ignition switch will turn to
“ON” mode.
When the keyless access with push button start system is deacti-
vated in customization setting, the push-button ignition switch will
turn to “ACC” mode. Modes can be changed by pressing the push-
button ignition switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode
changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the keyless
access with push button start system indicator light (green)
turns on.
Press the push-button ignition switch.
In the event that the push-button ignition switch still cannot be oper-
ated, contact your SUBARU dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
396
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Ensure that the shift lever is in neutral and depress the clutch
pedal.
Touch the SUBARU emblem
side of the access key to the
push-button ignition switch.
When the access key is detected,
a buzzer sounds and the push-
button ignition switch will turn to
“ON” mode.
When the keyless access with push button start system is deacti-
vated in customization setting, the push-button ignition switch will
turn to “ACC” mode. Modes can be changed by pressing the push-
button ignition switch with the clutch pedal released. (The mode
changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Firmly depress the clutch pedal and check that the keyless
access with push button start system indicator light (green)
turns on.
Press the push-button ignition switch.
In the event that the push-button ignition switch still cannot be oper-
ated, contact your SUBARU dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
397
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stopping the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the select lever to P and press
the push-button ignition switch as you normally do when stopping the
engine.
Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to neutral and press
the push-button ignition switch as you normally do when stopping the
engine.
Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
access key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.
(P. 325)
Alarm (if equipped)
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set,
the alarm may be triggered. (P. 81)
If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the keyless access with
push button start system
Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or remote keyless entry
system.
398
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can call your SUBARU dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle following
the steps below.
Connect the jumper cables according to the following pro-
cedures:
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem only: Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle
with the push-button ignition switch off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
399
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicles without a keyless access with push button start
system: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle
and turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, then start
the vehicle's engine.
Vehicles with a keyless access with push button start sys-
tem: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and
turn the push-button ignition switch to “ON” mode, then
start the vehicle's engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
4
STEP
5
400
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
Avoiding a discharged battery
Turn off the headlights and the air conditioning system while the engine is
off.
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a keyless
access with push button start system)
In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the key-
less access with push button start system when the battery is dis-
charged. Use the remote keyless entry system or the mechanical key to
lock or unlock the doors.
The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a
malfunction.
The push-button ignition switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When
the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in
before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn
the push-button ignition switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the push-button ignition switch was in
before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting
the battery.
5
When trouble arises
401
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near
the battery.
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery.
When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
Do not lean over the battery.
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
Do not allow children near the battery.
To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter
may overheat and become a fire hazard.
402
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
When closing the doors
While pushing the door glass towards the inside of the vehicle, slowly close
the door.
Because the side window open/close function linked to door operation will
not operate, the window may interfere with the vehicle body, possibly
scratching both the vehicle body and window, or even shattering the window.
5
When trouble arises
403
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the engine
hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the engine hood after the
steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the engine hood.
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine and call your SUBARU dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
404
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
Steam is coming from under the engine hood.
WARNING
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the engine
hood of your vehicle
If steam is seen coming from under the engine hood, do not open the
engine hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may
be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns.
Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 416)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
405
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
406
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the select
lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or shift
lever to neutral (vehicles with a manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear
wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear
wheels to help provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Shift the select lever to the D or R position (vehicles with an
automatic transmission) or shift lever to 1 or R position
(vehicles with a manual transmission) and release the park-
ing brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the
accelerator pedal.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
Press to turn off TRAC. (P. 216)
5
When trouble arises
407
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
When shifting the select lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the select
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
408
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicle specifications
6
409
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)......... 410
Fuel information ............... 422
Tire information ................ 426
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ..... 439
410
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
*: Unladen vehicle
Overall length 166.7 in. (4235 mm)
Overall width 69.9 in. (1775 mm)
Overall height
*
U.S.A.
56.3 in. (1430 mm)
Canada
56.1 in. (1425 mm)
Wheelbase 101.2 in. (2570 mm)
Tread
Front 59.8 in. (1520 mm)
Rear 60.6 in. (1540 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
Details are described on the tire and load-
ing information label. (P. 315)
411
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
SUBARU. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped under
the right-hand front seat.
This number is located on the
top left of the body panel.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.
412
6-1. Specifications
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
413
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Engine
Fuel
*: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) is not avail-
able, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be
used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.
Model FA20
Type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-
stroke gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.4 × 3.4 in. (86 × 86 mm)
Displacement 121.9 cu.in. (1998 cm
3
)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 93 AKI (98 RON) or higher*
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.)
414
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine oil selection
Always use SUBARU approved engine oil. For details, we recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU dealer.
If approved engine oil is unavailable, another motor oil of matching
quality can also be used.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY CONSERV-
ING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference*)
Without filter
With filter
5.5 qt. (5.2 L, 4.6 Imp. qt.)
5.7 qt. (5.4 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
Outside temperature
415
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: The oil quality desig-
nation by API (American Petro-
leum Institute) (SN)
Center portion: The SAE viscosity
grade (SAE 0W-20)
Lower portion: “RESOURCE
CONSERVING” means that the
oil has fuel saving and environ-
mental protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The ILSAC (International Lubri-
cant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification
Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.
416
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
SUBARU Super Coolant
Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-
silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol-
ogy
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO ZXE27HBR8
0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
CAUTION
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
417
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Electrical system
Differential
Battery
Specific gravity reading at
68°F (20°C):
1.250 1.290 Fully charged
1.160 1.200 Half charged
1.060 1.100 Discharged
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Oil capacity (Refer-
ence)
1.20 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Without LSD
Differential Gear Oil LT
Other gear oil that meets API GL-5 and SAE
75W-85 or GL-5 and SAE 75W-90 specifications
With LSD
Differential Gear Oil LX
Other gear oil that meets API GL-5 and SAE
75W-85 or GL-5 and SAE 75W-90 specifications
CAUTION
Differential gear oil
Using a differential gear oil other than Differential Gear Oil LT or LX may
cause occurrences of rattling noises while idling and poor fuel consumption.
Never use different brands together.
418
6-1. Specifications
Automatic transmission
*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Manual transmission
Clutch
Fluid capac-
ity*
7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type ATF WS
Gear oil capacity (Reference) 2.3 qt. (2.2 L, 1.9 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type and viscosity
Use either of the following:
“MG Gear Oil special II”
Other gear oil that meets API GL-3 or
upper grade and SAE 75W-90 specifica-
tions
CAUTION
Manual transmission gear oil
Using a manual transmission gear oil other than “MG Gear Oil special II”
may cause occurrences of rattling noises while idling and poor fuel con-
sumption.
Never use different brands together.
Pedal free play 0.2 0.6 in. (5 15 mm)
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
419
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Brakes
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50
kgf) while the engine is running.
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N,
20.4 kgf).
Brake disc
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and
the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Pedal clearance*
1
2.16 in. (55 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.008 0.079 in. (0.2 2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
7 8 clicks
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
Brake pedal
Pedal
clearance
Carpet
420
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Tires and wheels
Type A
Type B
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tire size P205/55R16 89V, T135/80D16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size
16 × 6 1/2J, 16 × 6 1/2JJ, 16 × 4T (compact
spare)
Wheel nut torque 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m)
Tire size 215/45R17 87W, T135/80D16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 17 × 7 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 89 ft•lbf (120 N•m, 12.2 kgf•m)
421
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
D: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Headlights
Low/high beam
D4S 35 A
Front side marker lights #194 3.8 C
Front turn signal lights WY21W 21 B
Front fog lights PSX24W 24
License plate lights W5W 5 C
Rear turn signal lights WY21W 21 B
Back-up lights W16W 16 C
Rear side marker lights W5W 5 C
Interior
Vanity lights 2D
Trunk light W5W 5 B
Interior light 10 C
Door courtesy lights T10 5 B
422
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your SUBARU has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
If your engine knocks
Consult your SUBARU dealer.
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehi-
cle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you acceler-
ate. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the specified octane
rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI (98 RON) or
higher. If 93 AKI (98 RON) fuel is not readily available in your area,
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) may be
used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. However,
you may notice a slight decrease in maximum engine performance
and you may hear some knocking (pinking) of an engine while using
91 AKI (95 RON) fuel. Use of 91 AKI (95 RON) fuel will not affect your
warranty coverage.
423
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Gasoline for California-certified LEV
If your vehicle was certified to California’s low emission vehicle (LEV) stan-
dards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label, it is designed to optimize
engine and emission performance with gasoline that meets the clean burn-
ing low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state
than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal speci-
fications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher sulfur
levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that
you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to deter-
mine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for service.
SUBARU recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent addi-
tives
SUBARU recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent addi-
tives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems.
SUBARU recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
SUBARU recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropri-
ately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excel-
lent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
424
6-1. Specifications
SUBARU does not recommend blended gasoline
If you use gasohol in your SUBARU, be sure that it has an octane rating
no lower than 93 AKI.
SUBARU DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing metha-
nol.
SUBARU does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
SUBARU DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If
fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be
adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your SUBARU dealer for service.
Use only gasoline containing a maxi-
mum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than 10%
ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
425
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
CAUTION
Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor
hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
426
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (P. 429)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 428)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 308)
427
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 3 11 )
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 420)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 3 11 )
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (P. 383)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY
USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for tem-
porary emergency use only.
428
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
429
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire size
Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
430
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of
SUBARU vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your SUBARU dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
431
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
432
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended
inflation pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer.
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded
vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
433
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
434
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1
* below), and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
435
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other
sidewall of the tire, or
(b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet-
rical tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a vehi-
cle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
436
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
437
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Tes t r im
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
438
6-1. Specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded
vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
439
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Keyless
access with
push button
start system
(
P. 23)
Keyless access with
push button start sys-
tem
On Off
Operation signal
(Hazard warning flash-
ers)
On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On Off
Operation buzzer
volume
Level 5 Level 0 to 7
Number of permissible
times of continuous
smart lock
Twice Unlimited
Remote key-
less entry
system
(
P. 37)
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, both
side doors
unlocked in
two steps
Both side
doors
unlocked in
one step
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
On Off
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
SUBARU dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your SUBARU dealer.
440
6-2. Customization
Remote key-
less entry
system
(
P. 37)
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Hazard warning flash-
ers)
On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On Off
Operation buzzer
volume
Level 5 Level 0 to 7
Door lock buzzer On Off
Trunk lid unlocking
function
On Off
Trunk lid unlocking
operation
Push and hold
(short)
Push and hold
(long)
One short push
Two short
pushes
Panic function On Off
Vehicle finder function On Off
Alarm
(
P. 81)
(vehicles
with a key-
less access
with push
button start
system)
Operation when doors
are unlocked using the
mechanical key
Off On
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
441
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 200)
Light sensor sensitivity ±0% -40% to +40%
Time elapsed before
headlights automati-
cally turn off after doors
are closed
30 seconds
0 second
60 seconds
90 seconds
Rear window
defogger
(
P. 251)
Time elapsed before
the rear window defog-
ger turn off (vehicles
with automatic air con-
ditioning system)
15 minutes Continue
Illumination
(
P. 253)
Time elapsed before
lights turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On Off
Operation after the
engine switch is turned
off
On Off
Interior light illumination
upon approach (vehi-
cles with a keyless
access with push but-
ton start system)
On Off
Interior light illumination On Off
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
442
6-2. Customization
For owners
7
443
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners .............. 444
Seatbelt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ..................... 445
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ..................... 448
444
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
445
7
For owners
Seatbelt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu'elle passe
bien sur l'épaule, sans pour
autant être en contact avec le
cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
Ne pas vriller la ceinture de
sécurité.
The following is a French explanation of seatbelt instructions
extracted from the seatbelt section in this manual.
See the seatbelt section for more detailed seatbelt instructions in
English.
446
Guide de la ceinture de sécurité avant
Pour faciliter le déroulage de la
ceinture de sécurité, passez-la
dans le guide.
Lorsque vous accédez aux
sièges arrière ou en descendez,
sortez la ceinture de sécurité de
son guide.
447
7
For owners
Entretien et soin
Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau
savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées ou exagérément usées.
DANGER
État et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Évitez d'abîmer les ceintures de sécurité en coinçant dans la porte une
sangle, le pêne ou la boucle.
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. Remplacez immédiatement une ceinture de sécurité
défectueuse. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant contre des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
Vérifiez que le pêne est bien verrouille dans la boucle de ceinture et que
les sangles ne sont pas vrillées.
Si la ceinture de sécurité ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez
immédiatement votre concessionnaire SUBARU.
Remplacez le siège avec la ceinture au cas où votre véhicule aurait été
impliqué dans un accident sérieux, même en l'absence de dommage
visible.
Ne pas essayer d'installer, démonter, modifier ou mettre au rebut les
ceintures de sécurité. Faites effectuer les réparations nécessaires par
votre concessionnaire SUBARU. Une mauvaise manipulation des
prétensionneurs peut en altérer le fonctionnement correct, avec un risque
de blessures graves, voire mortelles.
448
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag
instructions in English.
449
7
For owners
Modèles équipés d'airbags SRS et de retenues d'épaules pour
le conducteur, le passager avant, et les passagers arrières
côté vitres
Votre véhicule est équipé d'un système de retenue supplémentaire
en plus de la ceinture de sécurité à chacun des sièges avants et à
chacun des sièges arrières côté vitres. Le système de retenue
supplémentaire (SRS) consiste en six airbags. Les configurations
sont les suivantes.
Les airbags frontaux du conducteur et du passager avant
Les airbags latéraux du conducteur et du passager avant
Les airbags rideaux (pour le conducteur, le passager avant, et
les passagers arrière côté vitres)
Ces airbags SRS sont conçus uniquement comme un complément
à la protection principale fournie par la ceinture de sécurité.
Ce système contrôle également les prétensionneurs des ceintures
de sécurité avants.
450
DANGER
Airbag SRS
Pour obtenir la protection maximum dans le cas d'un accident, le
conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicules doivent toujours porter
leurs ceintures de sécurité lorsque le véhicule est en mouvement. L'airbag
SRS est conçu uniquement comme un complément à la protection
principale fournie par la ceinture de sécurité. Il n'annule pas le besoin
d'attacher les ceintures de sécurité. En combinaison avec les ceintures de
sécurité, il apporte la meilleur protection cumulée en cas d'accident grave.
Ne pas porter de ceinture de sécurité augmente les risques de blessures
graves ou mortelles lors d'une collision, même lorsque le véhicule a les
airbags SRS.
Ne pas s'asseoir ou s'appuyer trop près de l'airbag SRS. Parce que
l'airbag SRS se déploie à une vitesse considérable, encore plus
rapidement qu'en un clin d'œil, et à une force également considérable
pour vous protégez dans des collisions à grande vitesse, la puissance
d'un airbag peut blesser un occupant dont le corps serait trop près de
l'airbag SRS.
Il est également important de porter votre ceinture pour éviter les
blessures qui peuvent résulter de l'airbag SRS entrant en contact avec un
occupant dans une mauvaise position, comme projeté en avant lors du
freinage avant l'accident par exemple.
Même quand positionné correctement, il reste possible que l'occupant
souffre de blessures minimes, telles que des abrasions et des bleus au
visage ou aux bras à cause de la puissance de déploiement de l'airbag
SRS.
451
7
For owners
DANGER
Airbag SRS
Les airbags SRS se déploient avec une force et une vitesse
considérables. Les occupants qui ne sont pas dans des positions
correctes lors du déploiement des airbags pourraient souffrir de blessures
graves. Puisque l'airbag SRS a besoin de suffisamment de place pour se
déployer, le conducteur doit toujours se tenir droit et le plus en arrière
possible dans son siège, le plus éloigné possible du volant tout en
maintenant le contrôle complet du véhicule. De même, le passager avant
doit déplacer son siège le plus en arrière possible et se tenir le plus droit et
le plus en arrière possible dans le siège.
Ne placez aucun objet sur ou au-dessus du cache de l'airbag SRS ou
entre vous et l'airbag SRS. Si l'airbag SRS se déploie, ces objets
pourraient interférer avec son bon fonctionnement et pourrait être
propulsés à l'intérieur du véhicule et causer des blessures.
452
DANGER
Airbag SRS
Placez les enfants de 12 ans et moins
dans le siège arrière, correctement
attachés à tout moment. L’airbag SRS
se déploie avec une vitesse et une
force considérable, et peut blesser et
même tuer les enfants, particulièrement
s'ils ont 12 ans ou moins et qu’ils ne
sont pas retenus ou mal retenus. Parce
que les enfants sont plus légers et plus
fragiles que les adultes, le risque qu’ils
soient blessés par le déploiement est
plus élevé.
Pour cette raison, nous recommandons
fortement que TOUS les enfants (y-
compris ceux dans des sièges enfants,
ou qui sont trop grands pour les sièges
de sécurité enfants) s’assoient dans un
siège ARRIÈRE et soient correctement
attachés dans un siège de sécurité
enfant ou avec une ceinture de
sécurité, quel que soit le dispositif
adapté pour l’âge, la taille et le poids de
l’enfant.
Fixez TOUJOURS fermement TOUS
les sièges de sécurité enfants (y-
compris les réhausseurs vers l’avant)
dans le siège ARRIÈRE.
Les statistiques prouvent que les
enfants sont mieux protégés lorsqu'ils
sont assis à l'arrière plutôt qu'à l'avant.
453
7
For owners
DANGER
Airbag SRS
N’INSTALLEZ JAMAIS DE SIÈGE DE SÉCURITÉ ENFANT VERS
L’ARRIÈRE DANS LE SIÈGE AVANT. LE FAIRE POURRAIT CAUSER
DES BLESSURES GRAVES VOIRE MORTELLES À L’ENFANT EN
PLAÇANT LA TÊTE DE L’ENFANT TROP PRÈS DE L’AIRBAG SRS.
N’autorisez jamais un enfant à se tenir debout ou à s’agenouiller dans le
siège passager avant, et ne tenez jamais un enfant sur vos genoux ou
dans vos bras. L’airbag SRS se déploie avec une force considérable et
peut blesser ou même tuer l’enfant.
Quand l’airbag SRS se déploie, de la fumée se dégage. Cette fumée peut
causer des problèmes respiratoires pour les individus avec des
antécédents d’asthme ou d’autres problèmes respiratoires. Si vous ou vos
passagers avez des problèmes respiratoires après le déploiement de
l'airbag SRS, prenez l'air immédiatement.
Un airbag SRS qui se déploie dégage du gaz chaud. Les occupants
peuvent être brûlés s'ils sont en contact direct avec le gaz chaud.
454
Composition du système d’airbags SRS
Capteur frontal secondaire
(côté droit)
Témoin d'alerte du système
d'airbags SRS
Module de l'airbag frontal
(côté conducteur)(à deux
étapes)
Témoin MARCHE et ARRÊT
de l’airbag frontal du siège
passager avant (au centre
du tableau de bord)
Module de l'airbag frontal
(côté passager avant)(à
deux étapes)
Module de détection de
l'occupant passager avant
Capteur d'impact de porte
(côté droit)
Module des airbags rideaux
(côté droit)
Circuits électriques des
airbags
Module de l'airbag latéral
(côté passager avant)
Capteur de l'airbag latéral
(côté droit du montant
central)
Capteur des airbags rideaux
(côté droit de la roue arrière)
Prétensionneur de ceinture
de sécurité (côté du
passager avant)
455
7
For owners
Capteur satellite de sécurité
(sous le siège arrière du
milieu)
Capteur du système de
détection de passager du
passager avant
Bouton de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité (côté
passager avant)
Prétensionneur de ceinture
de sécurité (côté
conducteur)
Capteur des airbags rideaux
(côté gauche de la roue
arrière)
Capteur de l'airbag latéral
(côté gauche du montant
central)
Module de l'airbags latéral
(côté conducteur)
Capteur d'impact de porte
(côté gauche)
Module de contrôle d'airbag
(y-compris les capteurs
d'impacts)
Capteur frontal secondaire
(côté gauche)
Module des airbags rideaux
(côté gauche)
456
Votre véhicule est équipé d'airbags avancés (ADVANCED AIRBAGS)
conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux
véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le système d’airbag contrôle la
puissance de déploiement des airbags pour le conducteur et le
passager avant. Le système d'airbag passager avant comprend le
module de contrôle detection des occupants du siège passager
avant, etc.
Les principaux éléments du système d'airbags SRS sont illustrés ci-
dessus. Le système d'airbags SRS est commandé par le module de
contrôle de l'airbag. Le module de contrôle d'airbag consiste en un
capteur d'airbag.
Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latéral l'exige, le système
d'airbags SRS déclenche les dispositifs de gonflage. Le déploiement
rapide des airbags est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique
dans les dispositifs de gonflage, qui produit un gaz inoffensif
permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
457
7
For owners
Système avancé d'airbags frontaux SUBARU
Votre véhicule est équipé d'un système avancé d'airbags frontaux
SUBARU, conforme aux nouvelles conditions des airbags frontaux
avancés dans la norme Federal Motor Vehicle Safety amendée
(FMVSS) No. 208.
Le système avancé d'airbags frontaux SUBARU détermine
automatiquement la force de déploiement de l'airbag frontal SRS du
conducteur au moment du déploiement, et également l'activation ou
non de l'airbag frontal SRS du passager avant et, si activé, la force
de déploiement de l'airbag SRS frontal et le moment de déploiement.
Votre véhicule a des autocollants de sécurité sur les pare-soleils du
conducteur et du passager avant commençant par les mots “EVEN
WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS” et une étiquette attachée au
couvercle de la boîte à gants commençant par les mots “Even with
Advanced Air Bags”. Assurez-vous de lire avec attention les
instructions sur les autocollants de sécurité et les étiquettes.
Attachez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité. Le système avan
d'airbags frontaux SUBARU est un système de retenue en
complément qui doit être utilisé en combinaison avec une ceinture de
sécurité. Tous les occupants doivent mettre leur ceinture de sécurité
ou être placés dans des sièges de sécurité enfant adaptés.
L'airbag frontal SRS du conducteur est stocké dans la partie centrale
du volant. L'airbag frontal SRS du passager avant est stocké près du
haut du tableau de bord sous une marque “SRS AIRBAG”.
Dans une collision moyenne à sévère, les composants suivant se
déploient.
Airbag SRS frontal pour le conducteur
Airbag SRS frontal pour le passager avant
Ces composants complètent les ceintures de sécurité en réduisant
l'impact à la tête et à la poitrine de l'occupant.
458
DANGER
En cas de déploiement (gonflage) des airbags SRS
Ne touchez pas les composants du système d'airbag SRS près du volant et
du tableau de bord à mains nues immédiatement après le déploiement. Le
faire peut causer des brûlures car les composants peuvent être très chauds
à la suite du déploiement.
Précautions avec les sièges de sécurité enfant
N’INSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIÈGE ENFANT VERS L’ARRIÈRE DANS LE
SIÈGE PASSAGER AVANT MÊME SI L’AIRBAG FRONTAL SRS DU
PASSAGER AVANT EST DÉSACTIVÉ. Veillez à l'installer correctement sur
la banquette ARRIÈRE. De même, il est fortement recommandé que tout
siège enfant tourné vers l'avant ou siège rehausseur soit installé sur la
banquette ARRIÈRE , et que même les enfants trop grands pour utiliser un
siège de sécurité enfant s'assoient sur la banquette ARRIÈRE . Un enfant
assis sur le siège passager avant pourrait être tué ou gravement blessé si
l'airbag frontal SRS de passager avant se déployait. La banquette ARRIÈRE
est l'endroit où les enfants sont le plus en sécurité.
459
7
For owners
Airbag latéral SRS et airbag rideau SRS
Les airbags latéraux sont stockés côté portière de chaque dossier de
siège, et porte une étiquette “SRS AIRBAG”.
Dans une collision moyenne à sévère, l'airbag latéral SRS sur le côté
de l'impact du véhicule se déploie entre l'occupant et la partie basse
de la portière, et complémente la ceinture de sécurité en réduisant
l'impact sur la poitrine et la taille de l'occupant. L'airbag latéral SRS
opère uniquement pour les occupants des sièges avants.
L'airbag rideau SRS sur chaque côté de l'habitacle est stocké sur le
côté toit (entre le montant frontal et un point au dessus du siège
arrière). Une marque “SRS AIRBAG” se trouve au dessus de chaque
montant central.
Dans une collision latérale sévère, l'airbag rideau SRS sur le côté
impacté du véhicule se déploie entre l'occupant et la vitre latérale, et
complémente la ceinture de sécurité en réduisant l'impact sur la tête
de l'occupant.
460
DANGER
En cas de déploiement (gonflage) des airbags SRS
Ne touchez pas les composants du système d'airbag latéral SRS autour du
dossier du siège avant à mains nues immédiatement après le déploiement.
Le faire peut causer des brûlures car les composants peuvent être très
chauds à la suite du déploiement.
Après le déploiement, ne touchez aucune partie du système d'airbag rideau
SRS (depuis le montant frontal à la partie du rail latéral de toit au dessus du
siège arrière). Le faire peut causer des brûlures car les composants peuvent
être très chauds à la suite du déploiement.
Précautions pour l'airbag latéral SRS et airbag rideau SRS
L'airbag latéral SRS et l'airbag rideau SRS sont conçus comme un
complément à la protection principale fournie par la ceinture de sécurité. Ils
n'annulent pas le besoin d'attacher les ceintures de sécurité. Il est aussi
important de mettre votre ceinture pour aider à empêcher les blessures qui
peuvent résulter quand un occupant n'est pas assis dans une position droite.
Précautions avec les airbags SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les airbags SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les airbags SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux
ceintures de sécurité.
Le conducteur doit toujours se tenir droit et bien en arrière dans le siège,
le plus éloigné possible du volant, tout en conservant le contrôle complet
du véhicule, et le passager avant doit déplacer son siège vers l’arrière
aussi loin que possible, se tenir droit et bien en arrière dans le siège.
461
7
For owners
DANGER
Précautions avec les airbags SRS
L'airbag SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une violence
considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse, voire mortelle, si le passager
avant se trouve très près de l'airbag. Éloignez le siège passager avant au
maximum de l'airbag et réglez le dossier de siège de façon à être assis
bien droit dans le siège.
Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un
airbag. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes
pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. SUBARU recommande
vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et jeunes enfants aux places
arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue
adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les
enfants que le siège passager avant.
462
DANGER
Précautions avec les airbags SRS
Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du
siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre le
tableau de bord.
Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant l'airbag SRS passager avant ou
bien s'asseoir sur les genoux du
passager avant.
Ne laissez pas les occupants des
sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur
les genoux.
Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
463
7
For owners
DANGER
Précautions avec les airbags SRS
Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur le siège passager en appui contre
la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains
à l'extérieur du véhicule.
Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur le
tableau de bord ou la garniture centrale
du moyeu de volant.
Au déploiement des airbags SRS
conducteur et passager avant, tout
objet risque de se transformer en
projectile.
Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, à la
lunette arrière, aux montants avant et
arrière ni au rail latéral de toit.
464
DANGER
Précautions avec les airbags SRS
N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des airbags SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d'en gêner le
déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les airbags latéraux
de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le
déploiement accidentel des airbags latéraux, entraînant la mort ou des
blessures graves.
Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties
renfermant les composants des airbags SRS (oP. 454).
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des airbags
SRS.
Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déploiement (gonflage) des airbags SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.
Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement de l’airbag
SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien
descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
Si les parties renfermant les airbags SRS, telles que la garniture du volant
et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou
craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire SUBARU.
465
7
For owners
DANGER
Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système d'airbags SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire SUBARU si vous avez
besoin d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des
modifications suivantes.
Les airbags SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se
déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des airbags SRS.
Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit, porte, partie
basse de la porte ou de la garniture de porte.
Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-choc avant ou des
flancs de l'habitacle.
Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc., sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.).
Modification du système de suspension du véhicule.
Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur
ou d'un lecteur CD.
Aménagements du véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap
physique.
466
Moniteurs du système d’airbags SRS
Un système de diagnostic
contrôle continuellement la
fonctionnalité du système
d'airbag SRS (y-compris les
prétensionneurs des ceintures
de sécurité avants) lors de la
conduite du véhicule. Le témoin
lumineux du système d'airbags
SRS montrera l'opération
normale en s'allumant pendant
environ 6 secondes quand le
contacteur de démarrage est mis
en position “ON”.
467
7
For owners
Les composants suivants sont contrôlés par l'indicateur:
Capteur frontal secondaire (côté droit)
Capteur frontal secondaire (côté gauche)
Module de contrôle d'airbag (y-compris les capteurs d'impacts)
Module de l'airbag frontal (côté conducteur)
Module de l'airbag frontal (côté passager avant)
Capteur de l'airbag latéral (côté droit du montant central)
Capteur de l'airbag latéral (côté gauche du montant central)
Capteur d'impact de porte (côté droit)
Capteur d'impact de porte (côté gauche)
Module de l'airbags latéral (côté conducteur)
Module de l'airbag latéral (côté passager avant)
Capteur des airbags rideaux (côté droit de la roue arrière)
Capteur des airbags rideaux (côté gauche de la roue arrière)
Module des airbags rideaux (côté droit)
Module des airbags rideaux (côté gauche)
Capteur satellite de sécurité (sous le siège arrière du milieu)
Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité (côté conducteur)
Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité (côté passager avant)
Bouton de boucle de ceinture de sécurité (côté passager avant)
Capteur du système de détection de l'occupant passager avant
Module de commande de détection de l'occupant passager avant
Témoin indicateur MARCHE et ARRÊT de l'airbag frontal du
passager avant
Tous les câblages connexes
468
DANGER
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Si le témoin lumineux montre une des conditions suivants, il peut y avoir un
dysfonctionnement avec les prétensionneurs des ceintures de sécurité et/ou
le système d'airbags SRS. Amenez immédiatement votre véhicule au
concessionnaire SUBARU le plus proche pour une vérification du système.
Sans vérification ou réparation adaptée, les prétensionneurs des ceintures
de sécurité et/ou des airbags SRS ne fonctionneront pas correctement en
cas de collision, ce qui pourrait augmenter les risques de blessures.
Clignotement du témoin lumineux
Le témoin lumineux ne s'allume pas quand le contacteur de démarrage est
d'abord mis en position “ON”.
Éclairage continu du témoin lumineux
Éclairage du témoin lumineux pendant la conduite
Index
469
Abbreviation list ..................... 470
Alphabetical index.................. 471
What to do if... ........................ 481
470
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSD Limited Slip Differential
M + S Mud and Snow
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System
TRAC Traction Control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
471
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.................................... 234, 241
ABS........................................... 215
Access key
If the access key does
not operate properly........... 394
Air conditioning filter.............. 322
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter............. 322
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 241
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 234
Airbags
Airbag operating
conditions................... 102, 110
Airbag precautions for
your child............................ 116
Airbag warning light.............. 365
Curtain airbag
operating conditions........... 110
Curtain airbag
precautions ........................ 116
Front passenger occupant
detection system................ 122
General airbag
precautions ........................ 116
Locations of airbags ............... 87
Modification and
disposal of airbags............. 119
Proper driving
posture ......................... 85, 116
Side airbag operating
conditions........................... 110
Side airbag
precautions ........................ 116
Side and curtain airbags
operating conditions........... 110
Side and curtain airbags
precautions ........................ 116
SRS airbags ........................... 87
Alarm.......................................... 81
Antenna.................................... 275
Anti-lock brake system............215
Audio input ...............................252
Audio system
Antenna.................................275
Audio input ............................252
AUX port................................252
iPod.......................................252
Portable music player............252
USB memory.........................252
USB port................................252
Automatic air conditioning
system ....................................241
Automatic light
control system.......................200
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .........172
If the select lever cannot be
shifted from P......................392
Manual mode ........................175
Mode select switch................174
AUX port ...................................252
A
472
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs .............337
Wattage.................................421
Battery
Checking ...............................302
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ..............398
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................226
Bottle holders...........................257
Brake
Fluid ......................................300
Parking brake........................183
Brake assist..............................215
Break-in tips .............................149
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control.................................189
Care
Alcantara
®
.............................280
Exterior..................................272
Interior...................................276
Seatbelts ...............................277
Cargo capacity .........................221
Chains.......................................228
Child restraint system
Booster seats,
definition .............................132
Booster seats,
installation...........................136
Convertible seats,
definition .............................132
Convertible seats,
installation...........................136
Front passenger occupant
detection system.................122
Infant seats,
definition .............................132
Infant seats,
installation...........................136
Installing CRS with
LATCH anchors..................137
Installing CRS with
seatbelts .............................139
Installing CRS with
top tether straps..................142
Child safety
Airbag precautions................116
Battery precautions.......305, 401
Child restraint system ...........132
How your child should
wear the seatbelt ..................60
Installing child restraints........136
Power window lock switch ......70
Power window
precautions ...........................72
Removed key battery
precautions .........................328
Seat heater precautions........ 267
Seatbelt guide.........................59
Seatbelt precautions ...............62
Trunk precautions ...................48
Cleaning
Alcantara
®
.............................280
Exterior..................................272
Interior...................................276
Seatbelts...............................277
Clock.........................................262
Condenser ................................300
Console tray.............................258
Cooling system
Engine overheating...............403
Cruise control ..........................210
Cup holders..............................258
Customizable features ............439
B
C
473
Alphabetical index
Daytime running light
system ................................... 203
Defogger
Rear window......................... 250
Side mirror............................ 250
Dimension................................ 410
Dinghy towing ......................... 231
Display
Multi-information display....... 195
Trip information .................... 196
Do-it-yourself maintenance.... 289
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights.............. 253
Wattage................................ 421
Doors
Door lock .................... 23, 37, 42
Door windows......................... 70
Side mirrors............................ 67
Driver's seatbelt
reminder light........................ 367
Driving
Break-in tips ......................... 149
Correct posture....................... 85
Procedures........................... 146
Winter drive tips.................... 226
Electric power steering ...........215
Emergency, in case of
If the access key does
not operate properly............394
If the engine will not start ......389
If the select lever cannot
be shifted from P.................392
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ..............398
If the warning buzzer
sounds ................................364
If the warning light
turns on...............................364
If you have a flat tire .............378
If you lose your keys .............393
If you think something is
wrong ..................................362
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................406
If your vehicle needs to
be towed .............................355
If your vehicle overheats .......403
D E
474
Alphabetical index
Engine
Compartment ........................294
Engine hood..........................292
Engine switch................160, 169
How to start the
engine.........................160, 169
Identification number.............411
If the engine will not start ......389
Ignition switch................160, 169
Overheating...........................403
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................416
Checking ...............................298
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ......................................185
Engine hood .............................292
Engine immobilizer system.......77
Engine oil
Capacity ................................414
Checking ...............................295
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................226
Engine switch...................160, 169
Engine switch light ..................253
Event data recorder ...................16
Floor mat ..................................268
Fluid
Brake.....................................300
Washer..................................306
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............337
Switch ...................................206
Wattage.................................421
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............337
Switch ...................................206
Wattage.................................421
Front passenger occupant
detection system ...................122
Front passenger's seatbelt
reminder light ........................367
Front seats
Adjustment..............................51
Front side marker light
Replacing light bulbs.............337
Wattage.................................421
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............337
Switch ...................................182
Wattage.................................421
F
475
Alphabetical index
Fuel
Capacity ............................... 413
Fuel gauge ........................... 185
Fuel pump shut off system ... 363
Gas station information ........ 484
Information ........................... 422
Refueling ................................ 73
Fuel door.................................... 73
Fuel filler lid............................... 73
Fuel pump shut off system .... 363
Fuses........................................ 329
Gauges ..................................... 185
Glove box................................. 256
Hazard lights
Switch................................... 354
Hazard warning flashers
Switch................................... 354
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................ 56
Headlights
Discharge headlight
precautions ........................ 351
Replacing light bulbs ............ 337
Switch................................... 200
Wattage................................ 421
Heaters
Seat heaters......................... 266
Side mirror............................ 250
Horn.......................................... 184
I/M test.......................................288
Identification
Engine...................................411
Vehicle ..................................411
Ignition switch..................160, 169
Ignition switch light
Ignition switch light................253
Illuminated entry system.........253
Immobilizer system....................77
Indicator lights .........................190
Inside rear view mirror ..............66
Interior light
Interior light ...........................254
Switch....................................254
Wattage.................................421
Jack
Vehicle-equipped
jack .....................................378
Jack handle ..............................378
G
H
I
J
476
Alphabetical index
Keyless entry..............................37
Keys
Access key..............................20
Engine switch................160, 169
If you lose your keys .............393
If your access key
battery is discharged...........394
Key number.............................20
Keyless entry...........................37
Keys ........................................20
Mechanical key .......................21
Transmitter..............................37
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs .............337
Wattage.................................421
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................337
Wattage.................................421
Lights
Door courtesy lights ..............253
Engine switch light ................253
Fog light switch .....................206
Hazard light switch................354
Hazard warning flasher
switch..................................354
Headlights switch ..................200
Interior light switch ................254
Replacing light bulbs .............337
Turn signal lever....................182
Vanity lights...........................261
Wattage.................................421
Load capacity...........................225
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance.......................289
General maintenance............285
Maintenance data .................410
Maintenance requirements ... 282
Manual air conditioning
system ....................................234
Manual transmission ...............179
Meter
Instrument panel
light control .........................189
Meters...................................185
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror ............66
Side mirror heater .................250
Side mirrors.............................67
Vanity mirrors........................261
Multi-information display........195
Noise from under vehicle..........14
Odometer..................................185
Oil
Engine oil ..............................295
Opener
Engine hood..........................292
Fuel filler lid.............................73
Trunk lid ..................................45
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............67
Outside temperature
display ....................................263
Overheating, Engine................403
K
L
M
N
O
477
Alphabetical index
Parking brake .......................... 183
Parking lights
Switch................................... 200
Power outlets........................... 264
Power windows ......................... 70
Radiator.................................... 300
Rear seats.................................. 54
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 337
Switch................................... 200
Wattage................................ 421
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 337
Switch................................... 182
Wattage................................ 421
Rear window defogger............ 250
Replacing
Fuses.................................... 329
Key battery ........................... 325
Light bulbs............................ 337
Tires ..................................... 378
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ..................... 445
REV indicator........................... 150
Seatbelts
Adjusting the seatbelt..............58
Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR).....................60
Child restraint system
installation...........................136
Cleaning and maintaining
the seatbelts .......................277
Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR).....................60
How to wear your seatbelt.......58
How your child should
wear the seatbelt ..................60
Pregnant women,
proper seatbelt use...............62
Reminder light .......................367
Seatbelt guide .........................59
Seatbelt pretensioners ............59
Seat heaters..............................266
Seating capacity.......................225
P
R
S
478
Alphabetical index
Seats
Adjustment ..............................51
Adjustment precautions...........52
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ..............136
Cleaning................................276
Head restraint..........................56
Properly sitting in the seat.......85
Seat heaters..........................266
Service reminder
indicators ..............................190
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.........172
If the select lever cannot
be shifted from P.................392
Manual transmission .............179
Shift lock system .....................392
Side airbags................................87
Side maker lights
Replacing light bulbs .............337
Switch....................................200
Wattage.................................421
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding...............67
Keyless access with
push button start system
Antenna location .....................25
“Keyless access” entry
function .................................23
Starting the engine................160
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ..................420
Storage location....................378
Spark plug ................................416
Specifications ..........................410
Speedometer
Speedometer ........................185
Steering
Column lock release ...............65
Steering wheel
Adjustment..............................65
Storage feature ........................255
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................406
Sun visors ................................260
Switch
Driving mode selector
switch..................................174
Engine switch................160, 169
Fog light switch .....................206
Hazard light switch................354
Hazard warning flasher
switch..................................354
Ignition switch ...............160, 169
Light switches .......................200
“ODO/TRIP” switch ...............187
Power door lock
switch....................................43
Power window switch..............70
Transmission shift
switches......................175, 177
Window lock switch.................70
Wiper and washer
switch..................................207
479
Alphabetical index
Tachometer
Tachometer .......................... 185
Tail lights
Switch................................... 200
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...................................... 81
Engine immobilizer system..... 77
Theft prevention labels............. 80
Tire inflation pressure ............ 420
Tire information
Glossary ............................... 432
Size ...................................... 429
Tire identification number..... 428
Uniform tire quality
grading............................... 430
Tires
Chains .................................. 228
Checking .............................. 308
Compact spare tire ............... 378
If you have a flat tire ............. 378
Inflation pressure.................. 315
Inflation pressure sensor ...... 308
Information ........................... 426
Replacing ............................. 378
Rotating tires ........................ 308
Size ...................................... 420
Snow tires............................. 226
Spare tire.............................. 378
Tire pressure monitoring
system................................ 367
Tools .........................................378
Towing
Dinghy towing........................231
Emergency towing.................355
TRAC .........................................215
Traction control........................215
Transmission shift
switches .........................175, 177
Transmitter
Locking/Unlocking ...................37
Replacing the battery ............325
Transmitter..............................37
Trip meter .................................185
Trunk lid
Opener ....................................45
Trunk light
Wattage.................................421
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............337
Switch....................................182
Wattage.................................421
USB port ...................................252
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................261
Wattage.................................421
Vanity mirrors...........................261
Vehicle identification
number ...................................411
Vehicle stability control
(VSC).......................................215
Vehicle stability control
(VSC) SPORT mode...............217
T
U
V
480
Alphabetical index
Warning buzzers
Electric power steering..........365
Seatbelt reminder..................367
Warning lights
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature
warning light........................367
Anti-lock brake
system ................................365
Brake assist system ..............365
Brake system ........................364
Charging system ...................364
Cruise control
indicator light.......................365
Electric power steering
system warning light ...........365
Electronic engine control
system ................................365
Engine oil pressure ...............364
Keyless access with
push button start
system ........................365, 374
Low fuel level ........................367
Low tire pressure...................367
Malfunction indicator
lamp....................................365
Open door .............................367
Pretensioners........................365
Seatbelt reminder
light .....................................367
Slip indicator light..................365
SRS airbags..........................365
Tire pressure monitoring
system ................................367
Washer
Checking ...............................306
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................226
Switch....................................207
Washing and waxing ...............272
Weight
Cargo capacity ......................221
Load limits.............................225
Weight...................................410
Wheels ......................................319
Window glasses ........................70
Window lock switch...................70
Windows
Power windows.......................70
Rear window defogger ..........250
Washer..................................207
Windshield wipers ...................207
W
481
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 378
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 389
If the engine will not start
P. 7 7
Engine immobilizer system
P. 398
If the battery is discharged
The select lever cannot be
moved out
P. 392
If the select lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temper-
ature gauge enters the red
Steam can be seen coming
from under the engine hood
P. 403
If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 393
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 398
If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 4 2
Doors
The trunk cannot be opened
P. 4 5
Trunk lid
The vehicle is stuck in mud
or sand
P. 406
If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 364
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
482
What to do if...
483
What to do if...
Warning lights
P. 365, 374
or
P. 364 P. 365
P. 364 P. 365
P. 364 P. 367
P. 367
or
P. 365 P. 367
P. 365 P. 367
P. 367
or
P. 365 P. 367
P. 365
*: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.
Brake system warning
light
Keyless access with push button start
system indicator light
Slip indicator
Charging system warn-
ing light
Cruise control indicator
light*
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Open door warning light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Low fuel level warning
light
Driver’s seatbelt
reminder light
SRS airbag system
warning light
Front passenger’s seatbelt
reminder light
ABS warning light
Tire pressure warning
light
Automatic transmission fluid temper-
ature warning light
Electric power steering
warning light
484
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 292
Trunk lid opener
P. 4 5
Engine hood lock release lever
P. 292
Fuel filler lid
P. 7 3
Tire inflation pressure
P. 420
Fuel filler lid opener
P. 7 3
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 73, 413
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
P. 4 2 0
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
• Without filter
• With filter
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
5.5 (5.2, 4.6)
5.7 (5.4, 4.8)
P. 414
Engine oil type
SUBARU approved engine oil
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
API classification SM or SN with the
words “ENERGY CONSERVING” or
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 0W-20
P. 414
3


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Subaru BRZ 2013 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Subaru BRZ 2013 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 6,77 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info